A2 - Workbook 1 PDF

A2
CIRCULAR MOTION 
CEDAR COLLEGE 1
May/June2014
May/June 2014 , ,Question
Question#7 ,#7
qp_42
, qp_42
14
17
Q20- (a) Define the radian.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A telescope gives a clear view of a distant object when the angular displacement between the
edges of the object is at least 9.7 × 10−6 rad.
(i) The Moon is approximately 3.8 × 105 km from Earth.

Estimate the minimum diameter of a circular crater on the Moon’s surface that can be
seen using the telescope.
diameter = .................................................. km [2]
(ii) Suggest why craters of the same diameter as that calculated in (i) but on the surface of
Mars are not visible using this telescope.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 2
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A
Answer
Oct/Nov 2007 , Question #1 , qp_4all the questions in the spaces provided.
2 1 (a) Explain
(i) what is meant by a radian,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) why one complete revolution is equivalent to an angular displacement of 2 rad.
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) An elastic cord has an unextended length of 13.0 cm. One end of the cord is attached to
a fixed point C. A small mass of weight 5.0 N is hung from the free end of the cord. The
cord extends to a length of 14.8 cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
14.8 cm
small
mass
Fig. 1.1
The cord and mass are now made to rotate at constant angular speed in a vertical
plane about point C. When the cord is vertical and above C, its length is the unextended
length of 13.0 cm, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07
CEDAR COLLEGE 3
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
13.0 cm
C C
Fig. 1.2 Fig. 1.3
(i) Show that the angular speed of the cord and mass is 8.7 rad s–1.
[2]
(ii) The cord and mass rotate so that the cord is vertically below C, as shown in
Fig. 1.3.
Calculate the length L of the cord, assuming it obeys Hooke’s law.
L = ............................................ cm [4]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07 [Turn over
CEDAR COLLEGE 4
4
Section A For
May/June 2008 , Question #1 , qp_4 Examiner’s
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided. Use
3 1 (a) (i) Define the radian.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) A small mass is attached to a string. The mass is rotating about a fixed point P at
constant speed, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
mass rotating
at constant speed
Fig. 1.1
Explain what is meant by the angular speed about point P of the mass.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 5
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

5
(b) A horizontal flat plate is free to rotate about a vertical axis through its centre, as shown For
in Fig. 1.2. Examiner’s
Use
plate
M
d
Fig. 1.2
A small mass M is placed on the plate, a distance d from the axis of rotation.
The speed of rotation of the plate is gradually increased from zero until the mass is
seen to slide off the plate.
The maximum frictional force F between the plate and the mass is given by the
expression
F = 0.72W,
where W is the weight of the mass M.

The distance d is 35 cm.
Determine the maximum number of revolutions of the plate per minute for the mass M to
remain on the plate. Explain your working.
number = ........................................... [5]
(c) The plate in (b) is covered, when stationary, with mud.

Suggest and explain whether mud near the edge of the plate or near the centre will first
leave the plate as the angular speed of the plate is slowly increased.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08 [Turn over
CEDAR COLLEGE 6
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
May/June 2010 , Question #1 , qp_41
4 1 (a) Define the radian.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A stone of weight 3.0 N is fixed, using glue, to one end P of a rigid rod CP, as shown
in Fig. 1.1.
glue
85 cm P
stone,
C weight 3.0 N
Fig. 1.1
The rod is rotated about end C so that the stone moves in a vertical circle of
radius 85 cm.
The angular speed ω of the rod and stone is gradually increased from zero until the glue
snaps. The glue fixing the stone snaps when the tension in it is 18 N.
For the position of the stone at which the glue snaps,
(i) on the dotted circle of Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter S the position of the stone, [1]
(ii) calculate the angular speed ω of the stone.
angular speed = ................................... rad s–1 [4]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10
CEDAR COLLEGE 7
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
Answer
Oct/Nov 2010 , Question #1 all the questions in the spaces provided.
, qp_43 Use
5 1 A planet of mass m is in a circular orbit of radius r about the Sun of mass M, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.1.
planet
mass m
Sun
mass M
Fig. 1.1
The magnitude of the angular velocity and the period of revolution of the planet about the
Sun are x and T respectively.
(a) State
(i) what is meant by angular velocity,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the relation between x and T.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Show that, for a planet in a circular orbit of radius r, the period T of the orbit is given by
the expression
T 2 = cr 3
where c is a constant. Explain your working.
[4]
© UCLES 2010 9702/43/O/N/10
CEDAR COLLEGE 8
5
(c) Data for the planets Venus and Neptune are given in Fig. 1.2. For
Examiner’s
Use
planet r / 108 km T / years
Venus 1.08 0.615
Neptune 45.0
Fig. 1.2
Assume that the orbits of both planets are circular.
(i) Use the expression in (b) to calculate the value of T for Neptune.
T = ....................................... years [2]
(ii) Determine the linear speed of Venus in its orbit.
speed = ..................................... km s–1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 9
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
Oct/Nov 2012 , Question #1 , qp_41
6 1 (a) State Newton’s law of gravitation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A satellite of mass m is in a circular orbit of radius r about a planet of mass M.

For this planet, the product GM is 4.00 × 1014 N m2 kg–1, where G is the gravitational
constant.
The planet may be assumed to be isolated in space.
(i) By considering the gravitational force on the satellite and the centripetal force,
show that the kinetic energy EK of the satellite is given by the expression
GMm
EK = .
2r
[2]
(ii) The satellite has mass 620 kg and is initially in a circular orbit of radius 7.34 × 106 m,
as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
initial
orbit
7.34 × 106 m
7.30 × 106 m
new orbit
Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/O/N/12
CEDAR COLLEGE 10
5
Resistive forces cause the satellite to move into a new orbit of radius 7.30 × 106 m. For
Examiner’s
Determine, for the satellite, the change in Use
1. kinetic energy,
change in kinetic energy = ............................................. J [2]
2. gravitational potential energy.
change in potential energy = ............................................. J [2]
(iii) Use your answers in (ii) to explain whether the linear speed of the satellite increases,
decreases or remains unchanged when the radius of the orbit decreases.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 11
Oct/Nov 2014 , Question #2 , qp_41 
6
7 2 A large bowl is made from part of a hollow sphere.
A small spherical ball is placed inside the bowl and is given a horizontal speed. The ball follows a
horizontal circular path of constant radius, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
ball
14 cm
Fig. 2.1
The forces acting on the ball are its weight W and the normal reaction force R of the bowl on the
ball, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
wall of R
ball
bowl
Fig. 2.2
The normal reaction force R is at an angle θ to the horizontal.
(a) (i) By resolving the reaction force R into two perpendicular components, show that the
resultant force F acting on the ball is given by the expression
W = F tan θ.
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/O/N/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 12
7
(ii) State the significance of the force F for the motion of the ball in the bowl.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The ball moves in a circular path of radius 14 cm. For this radius, the angle θ is 28°.
Calculate the speed of the ball.
speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 13
Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9702 42
(b) (i) m R Bqr / v C1

= = = R=(640 × 10–3 × 1.6 × 10–19 × 6.2 × 10–2) / (9.6 × 104 ) C1
= = = R=6.61 × 10–26 kg C1
= = = R=(6.61 × 10–26 ) / (1.66 × 10–27 ) u
= = = R=40 u ANSWERS A1 [4]
(ii) q / m ∝ 1 / r or m constant and q ∝ 1 / r B1

q / m for A is twice that for B B1
ions in path A have (same mass but) twice the charge (of ions in path B) B1 [3]
Q20-
1 7 (a) angle subtended at the centre of a circle B1
by an arc equal in length to the radius B1 [2]
(b) (i) arc R distance × angle C1

diameter R 3.8 × 105 × 9.7 × 10–6
= = = R 3.7 km A1 [2]
(ii) Mars is (much) further from Earth / away (answer must be comparative) B1
angle (at telescope is much) smaller B1 [2]
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9702 43
8 (a) photon energy R hc / λ
Page 2 Mark
–34 Scheme 8 Syllabus Paper
1 (a) (i) either ω = 2π R /(6.63 ω× =102πf
T orAS/A × 3.0f =
and ×110/ T ) / (590 × 10–9 ) C1
C1
GCE LEVEL
–19 – May/June 2014 9702 41
R
ω = 2π / 0.30 3.37 × 10 J C1
= 20.9 rad s–1 (accept 2 s.f.) Section A A1 [2]
number R (3.2 × 10–3) / (3.37 × 10–19 )
Q21- 1= =
(a) =(ii) kinetic
work done 9.5 × 1015
R bringing
energy =(allow
unit mass9.4
½mω 2 2× 1015)
x0 or v = ωx0 and ½mv2 A1
C1 [3]
M1
= ½ × 0.130 × 20.92 × (1.5 × 10–2)2 = 6.4 × 10–3 J
from infinity (to the point) A1
A1 [2]
[2]
(b) (i)2 p R h / λ
Page Mark Scheme Syllabus C1 Paper
–34 –9
= =(b) = R
P = –mφ
(b) E(i) (6.63
as magnet
GCE × 10
moves,
A/AS ) / (590
flux
LEVEL × 10 ) cup / aluminium giving 2007
is cut –byOctober/November rise to induced9702
e.m.f. B1 [1]04
–27 –1
= = = (inR 1.12 × 10
cup) kg m s C1
B1
15 Section A –27
(c) φ ∝ 1/x total momentum
induced e.m.f. gives R 9.5 rise× to × 1.12 and
10currents × 10heating of the cup B1
C1
–11 –1
R 1.06from × 10oscillations
kg m s of magnet so amplitude decreases A1
B1 [3]
2 1= = = thermal energy derived
(a) (i) angle subtended at centre of circle .......................................................................
7 7 –1 B1
or
either at 6R from centre, potential is (6.3 × 10 )/6 (= 1.05 × 10 J kg )
arc equal in length –11 to the radius ........................................................................... B1 [2]
(ii) force andRat1.06
induced e.m.f.
5R from× 10
gives Nrise to
centre, currents
potential is which 107)/5 (=
(6.3 × generate 1.26 × 107field
a magnetic J kg–1) A1 [1]
(B1)
C1
thechange
magnetic field opposes the motion of7 the magnet so amplitude decreases (B1) [3]
in energy = (1.26 – 1.05) × 10 × 1.3 C1
(ii) arc = rθ and for one=revolution, 2.7 × 10 J 6 arc = 2πr .............................................................
A1
M1
2 2
9 (a) time forθnumber
(ii) so,
either = use
2πr/r ofof=½mω
atoms x/0nuclei
and x/ activity
0 = 0.75(of
cmtheor xisotope) M1
2π ..................................................................................................
0 is halved so ¼ energy C1 A0 [1]
to betoreduced
or give new
change to one
in energy half=(of
potential 1.6 its
mJinitial
= (1/5 – 1/6)value)
× (6.3 × 107) A1 [2]
(C1)
7
change in energy = (1/5 – 1/6) × (6.3 × 10 ) × 1.3 (C1)
(b) (i) either either loss
weightin energy ==2.7
provides/equals6.4×–101.66 or
Jtheloss
centripetal giving loss = 4.8 mJ
= ¾ × 6.4 force A1 [4]
(A1) [2]
(b) (i) or A R λNacceleration of free fall is centripetal acceleration .................................... C1 B1
460 R N × ln 2 2/ (8.1 × 24 × 60 × 60) C1
9.8 = 0.13 × 8ω ...................................................................................................... M1
2 (c) the
(a) N R 4.6of× atoms
q =number
mc∆θ 10 -1 A1 [3]
M1
ω = 8.7–3 rad s .......................................................................................................
= 6.2 × 10–3 × 910 × ∆θ
A0 [2]
in4.8
12×g10 of carbon-12 23 –3
C1 [2]
A1
(ii) 8.5 × 10of–4water
∆θ =number K molecules in 1.0 kg R (6.02 × 10 ) / (18 × 10 ) C1
A1 [2]
(ii) force in cord = weight + centripetal R force
3.3 × (can
1025 be an equation) .......................... C1
(b) (i) forceratio in
amount R=cord
(3.3 ×=10
3.2/40 (4.6 ×× 5/1.8
(L25–) / 13) 108) or force constant = 5.0/1.8 ................................ C1
Q22- 2  
(a) (L – 13)
smooth curve × 5/1.8
with
R =7.2 = 5.0
decreasing
(7.3)mol
0.080 × 10 16 + 5/9.8 × not
gradient, 10-2 × 8.7
L ×starting at x2 =..................................................
0 M1 [1]
A1
A1 [2]C1
endL of= 17.2 cm ...........................................................................................................[2]
line not at g = 0 or horizontal A1 A1 [4]
(ii) (constant
pV = nRT centripetal force ofInternational
© Cambridge 5.0 N gives L = 16.6 2014
Examinations cm allow 2/4)
p × 210 × 10–6 = 0.080 × 8.31 × 310 C1
(b) straight line ×with
p = 9.8 105positive
Pa gradient M1 [2]
A1
line starts at origin A1 [2]
2 (a) (i) pV =(do nRTnot credit if T in °C not K)
V = (8.31 × 300)/(1.02 × 105) ............................................................................... C1
(iii) either pV = 1/33 × Nm <c2>
= 0.0244
(c) sinusoidal shapem (if uses Celsius, then 0/2) ..........................................................
B1 A1 [2]
N = 0.080 × 6.02 × 1023 (= 4.82 × 1022)
only positive values and peak / trough –27 height constant –26 B1
and m = 40 × 1.66 × 10 (= 6.64 × 10 ) C1
(ii)4 ‘loops’
volume occupied by one atom = 0.0244 / (6.02 × 1023) =–264.06 2× 10-26 m3 ............ B1 [3] M1
CEDAR COLLEGE 9.8 × 103 5 × 210 × 10–6 22
-26= 1/3 × 4.82 × 10 × 6.64 × 10 × <c > C1 14
<c2> ≈
separation √(4.06
= 1.93 × 10×5 -9
10 ) ................................................................................ A1
= 3.44 × –1
10 m ................................................................................... A0 [2]
T = =(2.40
3 (a) initially, pVc/ RMS 440 ×m10 s 5 × 5.00 × 10–4) / 288 = 0.417 A1
M1 [3]
5
finally, pV / T = (2.40 × 10–3× 14.5 × 10–4) / 835 = 0.417 M1
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2008 9702 04
Section A
3 1 (a) (i) angle (subtended) at centre of circle B1

by an arc equal in length to the radius (of the circle) B1 [2]
(ii) angle swept out per unit time / rate of change of angle M1
by the string A1 [2]
(b) friction provides / equals the centripetal force B1

0.72 W = mdω2 C1
0.72 mg = m × 0.35ω2
ω = 4.49 (rad s–1) C1
n = (ω /2π) × 60 B1
= 43 min–1 (allow 42) A1 [5]
(c) either centripetal force increases as r increases

or centripetal force larger at edge M1
so flies off at edge first A1 [2]
(F = mrω2 so edge first – treat as special case and allow one mark)
Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9702 41
2 (a) molecule(s) rebound from wall of vessel / hits walls B1
change in momentum gives rise to impulse / force
Section A B1
either (many impulses) averaged to give constant force / pressure
4 1 (a) or the molecules
angle (subtended) are in of
at centre random
circle motion B1
B1 [3]
(by) arc equal in length to radius B1 [2]
(b) (i) p = !" ρ<c2> C1

(b) (i) point S shown below C B1 [1]
5
(ii) 1.02
(max) × 10 "
× 0.900
force=/ tension
!
<c2> + centripetal force
= ×weight C1
2
centripetal
2
force5 = mrω C1
<c > = 3.4
15 = 3.0/9.8 × 10 0.85 × ω2
× –1 C1
C1
RMS = 580 m –1 s A1
Page 2
cω = 7.6 rad sMark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus A1 [3]
Paper [4]
2GCE LEVEL2 – 5
(ii) either <c > ∝ A October/November
T or <c > = 2 × 3.4 ×10 2010 9702 43
C1
2 RMS =
(a) (i) c27.2 830 m sor–1 27.2
+ 273.15 (allow 820)
+ 273.2 A1
C1 [2]
Section A
300.4 K A1 [2]
5 1   (c)
(a) c(i) rate of change of angle / angular
(alone) displacement M1
RMS depends
(ii) 11.6 Kouton temperature B1
A1 [1]
swept
so no effect by radius A1
B1 [2]
[2]
(ii) ω × T = 2π B1 [1]
(b) (i) (<c2> is the) mean / average square speed B1 [1]
(b) (ii) ρ = Nm/V

centripetal forcewith N explained
is provided
2
by the gravitational force B1
B1
so, pV = 2 Nm<c > 2
1/3
either mr(2π/T) = GMm/r or mrω 2 = GMm/r 2 B1
M1
and pV = NkT with k explained B1
r 3 × 4π2 = GM × T 2 A1
so mean kinetic energy / <EK> = ½m<c2> = 3/2 kT B1 [4]
GM/4π2 is a constant (c) A1
T 2 = cr 3 A0 [4]
(c) (i) pV = nRT
2.1 × 107 × 7.8 × 10–3 = n × 8.3 × 290 C1
(c) (i) either T 2 = (45/1.08)3 × 0.6152 or T 2 = 0.30 × 453 C1
n = 68 mol A1 [2]
T = 165 years A1 [2]
(ii) mean kinetic energy = 3/2 kT© UCLES 2008
(ii) speed = (2π × 1.08 × 108) / (0.615 × 365 × 24 × 3600) C1
= 3/2 × 1.38 × 10–23 × 290 C1
= 35 km s–1 A1 [2]
= 6.0 × 10–21 J A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 15
2 (a) (iii)
atomsrealisation that/ total
/ molecules internal
particles
–21
energy
behave is the total
as elastic
23
kineticspheres
(identical) energy C1
(1)
energy = 6.0 × 10 × 68 × 6.02 × 10
volume of atoms 5/ molecules negligible compared to volume of containing vessel C1
(1)
= 2.46 × 10 J A1 [3]
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9702 41
Section A
6 1 (a) force is proportional to the product of the masses and

inversely proportional to the square of the separation M1
either point masses or separation >> size of masses A1 [2]
(b) (i) gravitational force provides the centripetal force B1

mv2/r = GMm/r2 and EK = ½mv2 M1
hence EK = GMm/2r A0 [2]
(ii) 1. ∆EK = ½ × 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1) C1

= 9.26 × 107 J (ignore any sign in answer) A1 [2]
Page 2 (allow 1.0 × 108 J if evidence
Mark Scheme that EK evaluated separately for each r)
Syllabus Paper
2. ∆EP = 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1) C1
= 1.85 × 108 J (ignore any sign
Section A in answer) A1 [2]
(allow 1.8 or 1.9 × 108 J)
1 (a) g = GM / R2 C1
6 –1 6 –1 6 2
(iii) =either × 10–11
(6.67(7.30 × 10 ) ×– 10
× 6.4 23
(7.34 × 10×
) / (3.4 ) 10or) ∆E is N
= K3.7 kg–1 / EK increased
positive M1
A1 [2]
speed has increased A1 [2]
(b) ∆EP = mg∆h

2 (a) (i) sum of
because ∆hpotential
! R (or energy
1800 mand! 3.4kinetic
× 106energy
m) g isof atoms / molecules / particles
constant M1
B1
∆EPreference to×random
= 2.4 × 3.7 1800 A1
C1 [2]
= 1.6 × 104 J A1 [3]
(ii) no intermolecular forces B1
(use of g = 9.8 m s–2 max. 1 for explanation)
no potential energy B1
internal energy is kinetic energy (of random motion) of molecules B1 [3]
(reference to random motion here then allow back credit to (i) if M1 scored)
(c) gravitational potential energy = (–)GMm / x C1
v2 = 2GM / x C1
x = 4D = 4 × 6.8 × 106 C1
(b) kinetic energy ∝ thermodynamic temperature B1
either temperature in Celsius, not kelvin so incorrect
v2 = (2 × 6.67 × 10–11 × 6.4 × 1023 ) / (4 × 6.8 × 106 )
or temperature 6in kelvin is not doubled B1 [2]
= 3.14 × 10
v = 1.8 × 103 m s–1 A1 [4]
3 (use of 3.5 Dofgiving
(a) temperature 1.9 × 10is3 m
the spheres s–1same
the , allow max. 3) B1
no (net) transfer of energy between the spheres B1 [2]
7 2   (a) (i) F = R cosθ M1

W = R =sinθ
(b) (i) power m × c × ∆θ where m is mass per second M1
C1
dividing,
3800 = m W×=4.2F tanθ
× (42 – 18) A0
C1 [2]
g s–1
m(max. 1= if38derivation to final line not shown) A1 [3]
provides
(ii) some
(ii) the centripetal
thermal force
energy is lost to the surroundings B1
M1 [1]
so rate is an overestimate A1 [2]
(b) either F = mv2 / r and W = mg

4 or v2 = rg
(a) straight / tan
line θ
through origin C1
M1
v2 = (14
shows × 10–2 × 9.8)
acceleration / tan 28° to displacement
proportional C1
A1
= 2.58gradient
negative M1
v = 1.6
shows m s–1
acceleration and displacement in opposite directions A1
A1 [3]
[4]
3 (a) obeys the equation pV / T = constant B1 [1]

(accept pV = nRT)
© Cambridge International Examinations 2012
(b) (i) pV = nRT

CEDAR COLLEGE 16 C1
5.0 × 10 × 3.0 × 10–4 = n × 8.31 × 296 giving n = 6.1 mol
7
A1 [2]
(ii) pressure ∝ amount of substance

A2
GRAVITATION 
CEDAR COLLEGE 17
4 For
1 May/June 2002 , Question #1 , qp_4 Examiner’s
Use
Answer all the questions in the spaces provided.
1 (a) The Earth may be considered to be a uniform sphere of radius 6.38 × 106 m. Its mass is
assumed to be concentrated at its centre.
Given that the gravitational field strength at the Earth’s surface is 9.81 N kg–1, show that
the mass of the Earth is 5.99 × 1024 kg.
[2]
(b) A satellite is placed in geostationary orbit around the Earth.
(i) Calculate the angular speed of the satellite in its orbit.
angular speed = ........................................ rad s–1 [3]
(ii) Using the data in (a), determine the radius of the orbit.
radius = ........................................ m [3]
9702/4 M/J/02
CEDAR COLLEGE 18
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 If an object is projected vertically upwards from the surface of a planet at a fast enough
speed, it can escape the planet’s gravitational field. This means that the object can arrive at
2 infinity
Oct/Nov 2002
where , Question
it has #4 ,energy.
zero kinetic qp_4 The speed that is just enough for this to happen is
known as the escape speed.
(a) (i) By equating the kinetic energy of the object at the planet’s surface to its total gain
of potential energy in going to infinity, show that the escape speed v is given by
2GM
v2 = ,
R
where R is the radius of the planet and M is its mass.
(ii) Hence show that
v2 = 2Rg,
where g is the acceleration of free fall at the planet’s surface.
[3]
 
9702/4 O/N/02
CEDAR COLLEGE 19
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 May/June 2003 , Question #1 , qp_4
1 (a) Define gravitational potential.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain why values of gravitational potential near to an isolated mass are all negative.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The Earth may be assumed to be an isolated sphere of radius 6.4 × 103 km with its mass
of 6.0 × 1024 kg concentrated at its centre. An object is projected vertically from the
surface of the Earth so that it reaches an altitude of 1.3 × 104 km.
Calculate, for this object,
(i) the change in gravitational potential,
change in potential = ……………………………………. J kg–1
(ii) the speed of projection from the Earth’s surface, assuming air resistance is
negligible.
speed = ……………………………………. m s–1

[5]
9702/4/M/J03
CEDAR COLLEGE 20
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) Suggest why the equation
v 2 = u 2 + 2as
is not appropriate for the calculation in (c)(ii).
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
9702/4/M/J03 [Turn over

CEDAR COLLEGE 21
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Oct/Nov 2003 , Question #1 , qp_4
1 (a) (i) On Fig. 1.1, draw lines to represent the gravitational field outside an isolated
uniform sphere.
Fig. 1.1
(ii) A second sphere has the same mass but a smaller radius. Suggest what
difference, if any, there is between the patterns of field lines for the two spheres.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) The Earth may be considered to be a uniform sphere of radius 6380 km with its mass of
5.98 ⌅ 1024 kg concentrated at its centre, as illustrated in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
A mass of 1.00 kg on the Equator rotates about the axis of the Earth with a period of
1.00 day (8.64 ⌅ 104 s).
9702/4/O/N03
CEDAR COLLEGE 22
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
Calculate, to three significant figures,
(i) the gravitational force FG of attraction between the mass and the Earth,
FG = ………….…………………………. N
(ii) the centripetal force FC on the 1.00 kg mass,
FC = …………………….………………. N
(iii) the difference in magnitude of the forces.
difference = …………………………………….. N
[6]
(c) By reference to your answers in (b), suggest, with a reason, a value for the acceleration
of free fall at the Equator.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
9702/4/O/N03 [Turn over
CEDAR COLLEGE 23
5 May/June 2004 , Question #3 , qp_4 6 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A binary star consists of two stars that orbit about a fixed point C, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
R2
C
M1 M2
R1
Fig. 3.1
The star of mass M1 has a circular orbit of radius R1 and the star of mass M2 has a circular
orbit of radius R2. Both stars have the same angular speed , about C.
(a) State the formula, in terms of G, M1, M2, R1, R2 and for
(i) the gravitational force between the two stars,
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) the centripetal force on the star of mass M1.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The stars orbit each other in a time of 1.26 108 s (4.0 years). Calculate the angular
speed for each star.
angular speed = ................................... rad s–1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 24
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) (i) Show that the ratio of the masses of the stars is given by the expression
M1 R
= 2.
M2 R1
[2]
M1
(ii) The ratio is equal to 3.0 and the separation of the stars is 3.2 1011 m.
M2
Calculate the radii R1 and R2.
R1 = ........................................ m
R2 = ........................................ m
[2]
(d) (i) By equating the expressions you have given in (a) and using the data calculated in
(b) and (c), determine the mass of one of the stars.
mass of star = ......................................... kg
(ii) State whether the answer in (i) is for the more massive or for the less massive star.
...................................................................................................................................
[4]

CEDAR COLLEGE 25
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 The orbit of the Earth, mass 6.0 × 1024 kg, may be assumed to be a circle of radius
1.5 × 1011 m with the Sun at its centre, as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
Earth,
mass 6.0 x 1024 kg
Sun
1.5 x 1011 m
Fig. 1.1
The time taken for one orbit is 3.2 × 107 s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the magnitude of the angular velocity of the Earth about the Sun,
angular velocity = ............................... rad s–1 [2]
(ii) the magnitude of the centripetal force acting on the Earth.
force = ....................................... N [2]
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05
CEDAR COLLEGE 26
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) State the origin of the centripetal force calculated in (a)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Determine the mass of the Sun.
mass = ..................................... kg [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05 [Turn27over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 The definitions of electric potential and of gravitational potential at a point have some
similarity.
(a) State one similarity between these two definitions.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Explain why values of gravitational potential are always negative whereas values of
electric potential may be positive or negative.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
2 A mercury-in-glass thermometer is to be used to measure the temperature of some oil.
The oil has mass 32.0 g and specific heat capacity 1.40 J g–1 K–1. The actual temperature of
the oil is 54.0 °C.
The bulb of the thermometer has mass 12.0 g and an average specific heat capacity of
0.180 J g–1 K–1. Before immersing the bulb in the oil, the thermometer reads 19.0 °C.
The thermometer bulb is placed in the oil and the steady reading on the thermometer is
taken.
(a) Determine
(i) the steady temperature recorded on the thermometer,
temperature = ………………………… °C [3]
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/O/N/06
CEDAR COLLEGE 28
8 Oct/Nov 2006 , Question #4 , qp_4 For
8
Examiner’s
Use
4 A rocket is launched from the surface of the Earth.
Fig. 4.1 gives data for the speed of the rocket at two heights above the Earth’s surface, after
the rocket engine has been switched off.
height / m speed / m s–1
h1 = 19.9 106 v1 = 5370
h2 = 22.7 106 v2 = 5090
Fig. 4.1
The Earth may be assumed to be a uniform sphere of radius R = 6.38 106 m, with its mass
M concentrated at its centre. The rocket, after the engine has been switched off, has
mass m.
(a) Write down an expression in terms of
(i) G, M, m, h1, h2 and R for the change in gravitational potential energy of the rocket,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) m, v1and v2 for the change in kinetic energy of the rocket.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Using the expressions in (a), determine a value for the mass M of the Earth.
M = ………………………… kg [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 29
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/O/N/06
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
Section A

1 (a) Explain what is meant by a gravitational field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A spherical planet has mass M and radius R. The planet may be considered to have all
its mass concentrated at its centre.
A rocket is launched from the surface of the planet such that the rocket moves radially
away from the planet. The rocket engines are stopped when the rocket is at a height R
above the surface of the planet, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
R 2R
planet
R
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the rocket, after its engines have been stopped, is m.
(i) Show that, for the rocket to travel from a height R to a height 2R above the planet’s
surface, the change ΔEP in the magnitude of the gravitational potential energy of
the rocket is given by the expression
GMm
ΔEP = .
6R
[2]
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07
CEDAR COLLEGE 30
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) During the ascent from a height R to a height 2R, the speed of the rocket changes
from 7600 m s–1 to 7320 m s–1. Show that, in SI units, the change ΔEK in the kinetic
energy of the rocket is given by the expression
ΔEK = (2.09 × 106)m.
[1]
(c) The planet has a radius of 3.40 × 106 m.
(i) Use the expressions in (b) to determine a value for the mass M of the planet.
M = …………………………… kg [2]
(ii) State one assumption made in the determination in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2007
CEDAR COLLEGE
9702/04/M/J/07 [Turn31
over
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 A spherical planet has mass M and radius R.

The planet may be assumed to be isolated in space and to have its mass concentrated at its
centre.
The planet spins on its axis with angular speed , as illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
mass m
equator of
planet
pole of
planet
Fig. 1.1
A small object of mass m rests on the equator of the planet. The surface of the planet exerts
a normal reaction force on the mass.
(a) State formulae, in terms of M, m, R and , for
(i) the gravitational force between the planet and the object,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the centripetal force required for circular motion of the small mass,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) the normal reaction exerted by the planet on the mass.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Explain why the normal reaction on the mass will have different values at the
equator and at the poles.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2008 9702/04/O/N/08
CEDAR COLLEGE 32
5
(ii) The radius of the planet is 6.4 106 m. It completes one revolution in 8.6 104 s. For
Calculate the magnitude of the centripetal acceleration at Examiner’s
Use
1. the equator,
acceleration = .........................................m s–2 [2]
2. one of the poles.
acceleration = .........................................m s–2 [1]
(c) Suggest two factors that could, in the case of a real planet, cause variations in the
acceleration of free fall at its surface.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 33
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Define gravitational field strength.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A spherical planet has diameter 1.2 × 104 km. The gravitational field strength at the
surface of the planet is 8.6 N kg–1.
The planet may be assumed to be isolated in space and to have its mass concentrated
at its centre.
Calculate the mass of the planet.
mass = .......................................... kg [3]
(c) The gravitational potential at a point X above the surface of the planet in (b) is
– 5.3 × 107 J kg–1.
For point Y above the surface of the planet, the gravitational potential is
– 6.8 × 107 J kg–1.
(i) State, with a reason, whether point X or point Y is nearer to the planet.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) A rock falls radially from rest towards the planet from one point to the other.
Calculate the final speed of the rock.
speed = ...................................... m s–1 [2]

© UCLES 2009 9702/04/M/J/09
CEDAR COLLEGE 34
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
12 Oct/Nov 2009 , Question #1 all
Answer the questions in the spaces provided.
, qp_41 Use
1 (a) State Newton’s law of gravitation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The Earth may be considered to be a uniform sphere of radius R equal to 6.4 × 106 m.
A satellite is in a geostationary orbit.
(i) Describe what is meant by a geostationary orbit.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Show that the radius x of the geostationary orbit is given by the expression
gR 2 = x 3ω 2
where g is the acceleration of free fall at the Earth’s surface and ω is the angular
speed of the satellite about the centre of the Earth.
[3]
(iii) Determine the radius x of the geostationary orbit.
radius = ........................................... m [3]

© UCLES 2009 9702/41/O/N/09
CEDAR COLLEGE 35
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) Define gravitational potential at a point.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The Earth may be considered to be an isolated sphere of radius R with its mass
concentrated at its centre.
The variation of the gravitational potential φ with distance x from the centre of the Earth
is shown in Fig. 1.1.
distance x
0 R 2R 3R 4R 5R
0
–2.0
/ 107 J kg–1
–4.0
–6.0
–8.0
Fig. 1.1
The radius R of the Earth is 6.4 × 106 m.
(i) By considering the gravitational potential at the Earth’s surface, determine a value
for the mass of the Earth.
mass = ......................................... kg [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10
CEDAR COLLEGE 36
5
(ii) A meteorite is at rest at infinity. The meteorite travels from infinity towards the For
Earth. Examiner’s
Use
Calculate the speed of the meteorite when it is at a distance of 2R above the Earth’s
surface. Explain your working.
speed = ..................................... m s–1 [4]
(iii) In practice, the Earth is not an isolated sphere because it is orbited by the Moon, as
illustrated in Fig. 1.2.
initial path
of meteorite
Moon
Earth
The initial path of the meteorite is also shown.
Suggest two changes to the motion of the meteorite caused by the Moon.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 37
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 (a) A moon is in a circular orbit of radius r about a planet. The angular speed of the moon
in its orbit is ω. The planet and its moon may be considered to be point masses that are
isolated in space.
Show that r and ω are related by the expression
r 3ω 2 = constant.
Explain your working.
[3]
(b) Phobos and Deimos are moons that are in circular orbits about the planet Mars.
Data for Phobos and Deimos are shown in Fig. 1.1.
period of rotation
radius of orbit
moon about Mars
/m
/ hours
Phobos 9.39 × 106 7.65

Deimos 1.99 × 107
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11
CEDAR COLLEGE 38
5
(i) Use data from Fig. 1.1 to determine For

Examiner’s
1. the mass of Mars, Use
mass = ............................................ kg [3]
2. the period of Deimos in its orbit about Mars.
period = ...................................... hours [3]
(ii) The period of rotation of Mars about its axis is 24.6 hours.
Deimos is in an equatorial orbit, orbiting in the same direction as the spin of Mars
about its axis.
Use your answer in (i) to comment on the orbit of Deimos.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

CEDAR COLLEGE 39
4
Section A For
Oct/Nov 2012 , Question #1 , qp_41 Examiner’s
Answer , qp_41
the questions in the spaces provided. Use
Q16- 1 (a) State Newton’s law of gravitation.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A satellite of mass m is in a circular orbit of radius r about a planet of mass M.

For this planet, the product GM is 4.00 × 1014 N m2 kg–1, where G is the gravitational
constant.
The planet may be assumed to be isolated in space.
(i) By considering the gravitational force on the satellite and the centripetal force,
show that the kinetic energy EK of the satellite is given by the expression
GMm
EK = .
2r
[2]
(ii) The satellite has mass 620 kg and is initially in a circular orbit of radius 7.34 × 106 m,
initial
orbit
7.34 × 106 m
7.30 × 106 m
new orbit

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/O/N/12
CEDAR COLLEGE 40
 
5
Resistive forces cause the satellite to move into a new orbit of radius 7.30 × 106 m. For
Examiner’s
Determine, for the satellite, the change in Use
1. kinetic energy,
change in kinetic energy = ............................................. J [2]
2. gravitational potential energy.
change in potential energy = ............................................. J [2]
(iii) Use your answers in (ii) to explain whether the linear speed of the satellite increases,
decreases or remains unchanged when the radius of the orbit decreases.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 41
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
#1all
Answer the questions in the spaces provided. Use
16 May/June 2013 , Question , qp_42
Q18-1 (a) Explain what is meant by a geostationary orbit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A satellite of mass m is in a circular orbit about a planet.

The mass M of the planet may be considered to be concentrated at its centre.
Show that the radius R of the orbit of the satellite is given by the expression
R3 =
! GMT 2
4π2 "
where T is the period of the orbit of the satellite and G is the gravitational constant.
[4]
(c) The Earth has mass 6.0 × 1024 kg. Use the expression given in (b) to determine the
radius of the geostationary orbit about the Earth.
radius = ............................................. m [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13
CEDAR COLLEGE 42
4
Section A
17 May/June
May/June 2014 , Question
2014 #1 , qp_42
, Question #1 , qp_42
Q19-1 The mass M of a spherical planet may be assumed to be a point mass at the centre of the planet.
(a) A stone, travelling at speed v, is in a circular orbit of radius r about the planet, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.1.
stone
planet
Fig. 1.1
Show that the speed v is given by the expression
v = ! GM
r "
where G is the gravitational constant.

[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 43
5
(b) A second stone, initially at rest at infinity, travels towards the planet, as illustrated in Fig. 1.2.
stone
V0
planet
x
The stone does not hit the surface of the planet.
(i) Determine, in terms of the gravitational constant G and the mass M of the planet, the
speed V0 of the stone at a distance x from the centre of the planet. Explain your working.
You may assume that the gravitational attraction on the stone is due only to the planet.
[3]
(ii) Use your answer in (i) and the expression in (a) to explain whether this stone could enter
a circular orbit about the planet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 44
4
Section A
Answer , qp_41
the questions in the spaces provided.
Q21- 1 An isolated spherical planet has a diameter of 6.8 × 106 m. Its mass of 6.4 × 1023 kg may be
assumed to be a point mass at the centre of the planet.
(a) Show that the gravitational field strength at the surface of the planet is 3.7 N kg−1.
[2]
(b) A stone of mass 2.4 kg is raised from the surface of the planet through a vertical height of
1800 m.
Use the value of field strength given in (a) to determine the change in gravitational potential
energy of the stone.
change in energy = ..................................................... J [3]
(c) A rock, initially at rest at infinity, moves towards the planet. At point P, its height above the
surface of the planet is 3.5 D, where D is the diameter of the planet, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
D 3.5 D
path of
P rock
planet
Fig. 1.1
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/O/N/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 45
5
Calculate the speed of the rock at point P, assuming that the change in gravitational potential
energy is all transferred to kinetic energy.
speed = ............................................... m s−1 [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 46
8
Q22- 2 (a) On the axes of Fig. 2.1, sketch the variation with distance from a point mass of the gravitational
field strength due to the mass.
gravitational field
strength
0
0 distance
Fig. 2.1
[2]
(b) On the axes of Fig. 2.2, sketch the variation with speed of the magnitude of the force on a
charged particle moving at right-angles to a uniform magnetic field.
force
0
0 speed
Fig. 2.2
[2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/O/N/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 47
9
(c) On the axes of Fig. 2.3, sketch the variation with time of the power dissipated in a resistor by
a sinusoidal alternating current during two cycles of the current.
power
0
0 time
Fig. 2.3
[3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 48
4
20 Answer#1
May/June 2016 , Question all, the questions in the spaces provided.
qp_41
Q23- 1 (a) By reference to the definition of gravitational potential, explain why gravitational potential is a
negative quantity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two stars A and B have their surfaces separated by a distance of 1.4 × 1012 m, as illustrated in
Fig. 1.1.
1.4 1012 m
star A star B
P
Fig. 1.1
Point P lies on the line joining the centres of the two stars. The distance x of point P from the
surface of star A may be varied.
The variation with distance x of the gravitational potential φ at point P is shown in Fig. 1.2.
x / 1012 m
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
–2
–4
–6
–8
/ 108 J kg–1
–10
–12
–14
–16
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16
CEDAR COLLEGE 49
5
A rock of mass 180 kg moves along the line joining the centres of the two stars, from star A
towards star B.
(i) Use data from Fig. 1.2 to calculate the change in kinetic energy of the rock when it
moves from the point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m to the point where x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
State whether this change is an increase or a decrease.
change = ............................................................. J
..................................................................................
[3]
(ii) At a point where x = 0.1 × 1012 m, the speed of the rock is v.
Determine the minimum speed v such that the rock reaches the point where
x = 1.2 × 1012 m.
minimum speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
[Total: 8]
CEDAR COLLEGE 50
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 The planet Mars may be considered to be an isolated sphere of diameter 6.79 × 106 m with
its mass of 6.42 × 1023 kg concentrated at its centre.
A rock of mass 1.40 kg rests on the surface of Mars.
For this rock,
(a) (i) determine its weight,
weight = ............................................ N [3]
(ii) show that its gravitational potential energy is –1.77 × 107 J.
[2]
(b) Use the information in (a)(ii) to determine the speed at which the rock must leave the
surface of Mars so that it will escape the gravitational attraction of the planet.
speed = ....................................... m s–1 [3]
© UCLES 2011 9702/43/O/N/11
CEDAR COLLEGE 51
ANSWERS
ANSWERS
Q1- ANSWERS
Q1-
ANSWERS
1
Q1-
Q1-
Q2-
2Q2-
Q2-
Q2-

A/AS LEVEL EXAMINATIONS - JUNE 2003 9702 04
3 
Q3- 1 (a)
A/AS LEVEL EXAMINATIONS - JUNE 2003
work done in bringing/moving unit mass ......................................M1
9702 04
Page 2 from infinity to the Mark Scheme
point.......................................................... Syllabus
...... A1 Paper[2]
Q3- 1 (a) (use
workof A/AS LEVEL EXAMINATIONS
1 kgininbringing/moving
done the definition – max - JUNE
1/2) ......................................M1 04
unit mass 2003 9702
from infinity to the point.......................................................... ...... A1 [2]
Q3- 1 (a)
(b) potential
(use done
work of 1 at
kgininfinity
in the defined
definition
bringing/moving as–unit
being
maxmasszero........................
1/2) ............. B1
......................................M1
forces
from are always
infinity attractive..........................................................
to the point.......................................................... B1
...... A1 [2]
Q3-(b) 1 (a) so work
potential
(use ofwork got
at
1 kgdoneout
infinity in moving
defined
in theindefinition to
bringing/movingaspoint......................
being
– max 1/2) ..........................
zero........................ ............. B1
B1
unit mass ......................................M1 [3]
(max
forcespotential
are always is at infinity – allow 1/3)
attractive..........................................................
from infinity to the point.......................................................... ...... A1 B1 [2]
(b) so work
potential (usegot
at of out1 kg
infinity in defined
moving
in to point......................
the definition
as max 1/2) ..........................
being–zero........................ ............. B1B1 [3]
(c) (i) φ = -GM/R
(max
forces potential
are always is at infinity – allow 1/3)
attractive.......................................................... B1
-11
(b) change = 6.67
potential
so work got out in moving xat10infinity x 6.0defined
to 1024 as being
6 -1
x point......................
x({6.4 x 10 {1.94 x 107}-1) .....C2
} - ..........................
zero........................ .............
B1 B1[3]
7 -1
(c) (i) change
φ = -GM/R = 4.19
forces
(max potential is at -11are x 10
always J kg (ignore sign) .........................................A1
attractive..........................................................
infinity – allow 1/3) B1
change so=work
6.67 got x 10out xin6.0 movingx 1024tox({6.4 x 106}-1- {1.94 x..........................
point...................... 107}-1) .....C2 B1 [3]
2 7 -1
(c) (ii)
(i) change
½mv
φ = -GM/R = =
m
(max 4.19
φ x 10 J kg (ignore sign) .........................................A1
................................................................................
potential is at infinity – allow 1/3) C1
v2 = 2 x=4.19
change 6.67x x10 107 -11
= 8.38x 6.0xx10 10724 x({6.4 x 106}-1- {1.94 x 107}-1) .....C2
2 -1 7 -1
(c)
(ii) (i)
v½mv= 9150
change φ===mm-GM/R
4.19sφ ................................................................................
x..............................................................................
10 J kg -11(ignore sign) .........................................A1 C1
A1 [5]
7 x 1024 x({6.4 x 106}-1- {1.94 x 107}-1) .....C2
v2 = 2change
x 4.19 x=10 7
6.67 = x8.38
10 x x106.0
2 change -1= 4.19 x 107 J kg-1 (ignore sign) .........................................A1
(d) (ii) acceleration
v = 9150
½mv = mmφsis not constant.......................................................... C1
..............................................................................
................................................................................ B1
A1 [5]
[1]
2 7 7
v = 2 x 4.19 2 x 10 = 8.38 x 10
2 (a)
(d) ½mv
vacceleration
(ii) = 9150 m s=-1ism notφconstant..........................................................
.............................................................................. B1 C1[5]
................................................................................
A1 [1]
v2 = 2 x 4.19 x 107 = 8.38 x 107
2 (d)
(a) -1
accelerationv = 9150 is not m sconstant..........................................................
.............................................................................. A1[1] [5]
(-1 for each error or omission) ........................................ B1 B2 [2]
2 (a) (d) acceleration is not constant.......................................................... B1 [1]
(b) heat lost (-1 for each
by liquid gold error or omission)
= 0.95m x 129 x ........................................
∆T.................................. C1 B2 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
2 (a) heat gained (silver) = 0.05m x 235 x (1340 – 300) + 0.05m x 105 000..C1, C1 52
(b) heat lost(-1
122.5m∆T by=for
liquid
17each
470mgold = 0.95m
error or omission) ∆T..................................B2
x 129 x........................................ C1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE heat gained (silver) = 0.05m x 235 x (1340 – 300) + 0.05m x 105 000..C1,
∆T = 143 K.......................................................................................C1 C1 52
(b) 122.5m∆T
heat 17(-1
lost by=liquid for each
470m
gold = 0.95merrorxor129 omission) ........................................
x ∆T.................................. C1 B2 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
temperature = 143 + 1340 = 1483 K................................................A1 52 [5]
heat
∆T =gained (silver) = 0.05m x 235 x (1340 – 300) + 0.05m x 105 000..C1, C1
143 K.......................................................................................C1
(b) heat lost by liquid gold = 0.95m x 129 x ∆T.................................. C1
CEDAR
CEDAR COLLEGE
COLLEGE
(c) 122.5m∆T
e.g.
heat gained (silver) = 0.05m x 235 x (1340 – 300) + 0.05m x 105 000..C1, C1 52
= 17 470m
thermocouple/resistance
temperature = 143 + 1340 = 1483 thermometer .................................. B1
K................................................A1 [1]
[5] 52
∆T = 143 K.......................................................................................C1
3 (a) 122.5m∆T = 17 470m
(c) 0 is at
fe.g. natural frequency
+ 1340of= spring
thermocouple/resistance
temperature = 143 1483 (system) ..................................
thermometer ................................. B1
K................................................A1 B1 [1]
[5]
this is ∆T = 143
at the K.......................................................................................C1
driver frequency ....................................................... B1 [2]
A/AS LEVEL EXAMINATIONS - NOVEMBER 2003 9702 02
4
1 (a) (i) acceleration (allow a definition of acceleration) ............................ B1
(ii) the velocity is LEVEL
A/AS decreasing or force/acceleration
EXAMINATIONS - JUNE 2004is in negative 9702 04
direction – accept ‘body is decelerating’/‘slowing down’ ............... B1 [2]
1 (b)
(a) (i) charge is quantised/enabled
e.g. separation of dots becomes electron charge to be
constant/does notmeasured
continue to B1 [1]
Page 2 increase (must make a reference
Mark Scheme to-19the diagram) ........................ Syllabus B1 Paper
(b) all are
A/AS(approximately) n x (1.6 x- NOVEMBER
LEVEL-19EXAMINATIONS 10 C) 2003 9702 M104
(ii)1 so e = 1.6=x132
distance C (allow 2 sig. fig. only
10 cm........................................................................ B1 A1 [2]
summing charges and dividing ten, without explanation scores 1/2
Q4- 1 (a) (ii)2
(i) atradial Total
lines....................................................................................
constant speed, distance travelled in 0.1 s = 25 cm B1 [3]
2 (a) mean (value
pointing of the)
inwards square
...........................................................................
(allow ± 1 cm)............................................................................... C1 B1 M1
of the speeds (velocities)
distance = 132 + (4 x 25) of the atoms/particles/molecules A1 [2]
(ii) no difference= 232OR cmlines closer near surface of smaller sphere ......A1
...................................................................... B1 [3]
[4]
(b) (i) 1 C1
(b) (i) p F=G =ρGMm/R< c 22> 2 .............................................................................. C1
(c) s = ut3 + ½at -11 24
2 ==½(6.67 X 10 x 5.98
t25(allow g =xx10 10m )/(6380
-2 x 103)2
1.6
<c > = 3 xx 9.8
2 x x10 /2.4 = 2.5 105 s ............................................ C1 C1
= 9.80 N .................................................................................C1A1
t = 0.57
r.m.s speed = 500 ms-1
s ...................................................................................... A1 [3]
hence 2
6>photographs 6 2
(ii)
(ii) newF2C =<cmRω = 2 1.0 x 10 or(‘bald’
<c > answer
increases scores 2 marks
by factor of 4 only) ........... A1
.................................................................................... C1 C1 [3]
2
<cω >=∝2π/TT or......................................................................................
3/2 kT = 1/2 m<c > C1
C1
2 (a) 6 of body’s resistance/inertia
5
Tmass: measure
= {(1.0 2x 10 ) / (2.5 x 3 10 )} x 300 4 2
to changes in
FC = (4π x 6380
velocity/motion x 10 )/8.64 x 10 )
............................................................................. B1
= 1200 K A1 [3]
= 0.0337 N...............................................................................
weight: effect of gravitational field on mass or force of gravity ..... A1
B1
5 Total [8]
Q5- 3 (a) (i) any further
(force) comment 2
e.g. mass constant, weight varies/
(iii) FG - F= GM 1M2/(R1 + R2)
C==mg/scalar
9.77 N............................................................................
2 2 A1 B1 [6]
(ii) (force) = M1R1 ω or M2Rvector
weight and 2ω
..................................................... B1 B1 [3][2]
(c) because acceleration (of free fall) is (resultant) force per unit
(b)
(b) e.g.= where gravitational
x 108) or 2π/T field strength changes
ωmass 2π/(1.26
....................................................................................... B1 C1
(change)
= 4.99 in fluid
-8 surrounding
rad s-1 body…. 1 each, max 2 ................... B2 A1 [2]
acceleration x 10 = 9.77 m s-2 .............................................................. B1 [2]
[2]
-8
allow 2 s.f.: 1.59π x 10 scores 1/2
3 (a) force x perpendicular distance .....................................................M1
2 (a) (i) a,ω and x identified ………(-1 each error or omission) ................. B2
(c) (of the force)
(i) reference from taking
to either the pivot ..........................................................
moments (about C) or same (centripetal)A1 [2]
(ii) force
(-)ve because a and x in opposite directions B1
(b) MnoRresultant M2R2 force
= directed or M (in any 2 direction) 2 .............................................. B1
= M2Rposition/centre................................
OR
1 1a 1R1 ω mean
towards 2ω B1 B1 [3]
no resultant moment (about any point)......................................... B1 [2]
hence M1/M2 = R2/R1 A0 [2]
(b) (i) (ii) Rforces
2 = 3/4 in x 3.2 x 1011
springs aremk(e = 2.4 + x)x 10and 11
m – x) .................................... C1
k(e A1
(c) (i) correct direction 11 in both................................................................
10 B1 [1]
Rresultant
1 = (3.2 x =
10 k(e ) –+ Rx)
2 –
= k(e
8.0 –
x x)
10 ......................................................M1
m (allow vice versa) A1 [2]
if values are=both 2kx ............................................................................
wrong but have ratio of four to three, then allow A0 [2]
(ii)1 moment = 150 x 0.3 = 45 N m (1 sig. fig. -1) ................................ A1
1/2
(ii) F = ma ....................................................................................... B1
(ii)2 torque = 45 ....................................................................................
N 2m i.e. same 2 is (i) .................................................... A1
(d) (i) M2 == {(Ra -2kx/m
1 + R2) x R1 x ω } I G (any subject for equation)
A0 C1
(-)ve sign 11 2 10 -8 2 -11
explained...................................................................... B1
= (3.2 x 10 ) x 8.0 x 10 x (4.99 x 10 ) /(6.67 x 10 ) C1 [2]
(ii)3 45 = 0.12 x T................................................................................
29 C1
= 3.06 x 10 kg A1
(iii) Tω=2 375
= 2k/m N .....................................................................................
..................................................................................... A1
C1 [4]
(ii) less massive
2
(only award this mark if reasonable attempt at (i)) B1 [4]
(2πf) = 29 x 120)/0.90 .................................................................. C1
(2
(9.17 x 10 kg for more massive star)
4 (a) (i)1 amplitude
f = 2.6 Hz=.....................................................................................
0.4(0) mm ................................................................. A1 A1 [3]
Total [12]
4 (a) e.g. amplitude is not constant or wave is damped B1
(c) (i)2 wavelength
atomdo held = 7.5 x 10-2bymattractive forces
notinallowposition'displacement constant'
(1atom
sig. oscillates,
fig. -1 unless already penalised) ........................................ A1
Page 1 should be (-)cos, (not sin) B1 [2]
not just two forces ORMark 3D not Scheme1D Syllabus Paper
(i)3 period not A LEVEL - JUNE 2005
= 0.225 ms ........................................................................ 9702 C1 4
(b) T force
= 0.60 s proportional to x C1
frequency
any two = = 1/T = points,
relevant 4400 -1 Hz...........................................................
1 each, max 2 ........................................A1 B2
Q6- 1 (a)  ω = 2π/T
(i) angular speed =10.5 2π/Trad s (allow 10.4 → 10.6) C1 A1 [2]
[2]
3 (a) (i)4 vpV/T = 2π/(3.2 × 107)
= fλ= constant............................................................................ C1
(c) same period= 1.96 -2 -7 rad s-1 B1
T ==4400(6.5 x 7.5 106 x 10 × 10
30 300)/(1.1 x 105 x 540).................................C1
x................................................................... A1
C1 [2]
displacement-1always less M1 [6]
==330985mKs....................................................................................
............................................................................... A1
A1 [3]
amplitude
(ii) force = mrω 2 reducing appropriately
or force = mv 2
/r and v = rω C1 A1 [3]
(if uses
nd °C,rdallow 1/3 marks for clear formula)
for=26.0 and× 10 3 24 marks,
× 1.5 × ignore
1011 × (1.96the first × 10quarter
-7 2
) period
CEDAR3 COLLEGE
(b) (i) ∆U= 3.46
= q +× w 10 N22 Total
A1 [2]53[7]
© University
symbols identifiedof Cambridge
correctlyLocal Examinations Syndicate 2003
..........................................................M1
(b) (i) gravitation/gravity/gravitational field (strength)
directions correct.......................................................................... B1
A1 [1] [2]
4
(a) e.g. amplitude GCE A/AS
is not LEVEL or
constant - OCT/NOV
wave is damped2006 9702 B1 04
(c)Page 2 atomdo held in position byMarkattractive
not allow 'displacement constant' Scheme forces Syllabus Paper
atomshouldoscillates,
GCE
be A/AS(not
(-)cos, LEVEL sin) - OCT/NOV 2006 9702 B1 [2] 04
1 Page
(a) 1either ratio notofjust
work twodone ORMark
to mass/charge
forces 3D not Scheme
1D Syllabus Paper
or work force
done moving unit A LEVEL -from
mass/charge JUNE 2005
infinity 9702 4
(b) or bothThave = 0.60 not proportional to x
s potential C1
zero at infinity B1 [1
6 1 (a) either ratio any of two
workrelevant
done to mass/charge
points, 1 each, 10.4max 2 ........................................ B2 A1 [2]
 
Q6- 1 (a) (i)or work ω = 2π/T
angular
donespeedmoving
= =10.5
2π/Trad
unit
s-1 (allow
mass/charge from
→ 10.6)
infinity C1 [2]
(b) gravitational forces are = (always×attractive)
2π/(3.2 10 7
) B1
3 (a) or both have
pV/Tzero =can potential at infinity
constant............................................................................ C1 B1
(c) electricsame
forces period be attractive
6
or
-7 repulsive -1 5 B1 B1
T = (6.5 x =101.96
for gravitational, work got out as x ×
30 10x rad
300)/(1.1 s x 10 x
masses come together 540)................................. A1C1 [2]
(b) displacement
gravitational forces arealways (alwayslessattractive) M1 B1
= 985 K ....................................................................................
/mass moves from infinity A1 [3] B1
electric
(ii) forces
amplitude can orbeforce
attractive
2 reducing
mvor2 repulsive
appropriately C1 A1 [3] B1
forforce = uses
electric,
(if mrω
work done
nd °C, rd
=1/3
on charges
allow /rifand
marks same v sign,
for=clear
rω work got out if opposite sign as charges
formula)
for gravitational, work
3 24got out as 11 masses come -7 together
come for =26.0and
together × 10 marks,
× 1.5 × ignore
10 ×/mass the first
(1.96 quarter
× 10 period
)2 infinity B1 [4
moves from Total B1
3 (b) for (i) electric,
= 3.46
∆U =q+ ×w 22
10 Ncharges if same sign, work got out if opposite sign as A1 [2] [7]
2 (a) (i) idea work
of heat done
lost on(by oil) = heat gained (by thermometer) charges C1
32symbols
come together x 1.4 x (54 identified
– t) = 12 correctly
x 0.18 x (t..........................................................M1
– 19) B1
C1
(b) (i) gravitation/gravity/gravitational
t =directions field (strength)
52.4°C correct.......................................................................... B1A1 [1] [2]A1 [3
2 (a) (i) idea of heat lost (by oil) = heat gained (by thermometer) C1
(ii) 32 qx 1.4
is x
zero2 (54 – t) = 3 x2 0.18 x (t – 19)
12
....................................................................................... B1 C1
(ii)(ii)F = either
GMm/x ratioor(=GM1.6/54)= r =ω0.030 or (=1.6/327) = 0.0049 C1 A1 [1
t
3.46 =w52.4°C
× 10 22
is positive
(6.67OR
= University× 10∆U -11 =×wMand
× 6.0 24
×increases 11 2
10 )/(1.5....................................
UInternational × 10 ) C1B1 A1
Page 2 © of Cambridge
Mark Scheme Examinations 2004 Syllabus Paper
(b) thermistor∆Uthermometer
M =either
1.95 is× rise 30
10(= inkg (allow energy
kinetic ‘resistanceof thermometer’)
atoms ............................................M1 A1 [3] B1
(ii)
because ratio
small GCE A/AS
1.6/54)
mass/thermal =capacity
0.030 LEVEL - OCT/NOV
or (=1.6/327) = 0.00492006 9702 [4] 04
A1
B1 [2
and mean kinetic energy ∝ T ....................................................... A1
(c)Page
(b) 2 point
thermistor
boiling (allow
thermometerone of the
temperature (allow
is constant Mark
last‘resistance
two marksScheme if states ‘U increases so T rises’)
thermometer’) Syllabus Paper
B1
M1
Q7- 21 (a)
(a) because
eitherobeys
furtherratio the
small
comment law pV/T
mass/thermalGCE =
of work done to mass/charge A/AS
constant
capacity LEVEL or any - OCT/NOV
two named 2006
gas laws 9702
M1 04
B1
or
e.g. workalldone
atheating values ofmovingof p,
bulb unit
wouldV and mass/charge
T only rate
affect from infinity
of boiling A1 [2] A1 [2
(c) boiling point temperature is at
constant M1 [1
Q7-7 13 (a)
or both
or two have zero
correct potential
assumptions infinity
of kinetic theory of ideal gas (B1) B1
2© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
(a) either
use ofratio
further comment
a = of
– ω workx done
clear
third correct assumption to mass/charge(B1) C1
(b) or gravitational forces 2
e.g. work
either ωdone
heating of
= √(2k/m) bulb are
moving orunit
would ω(always
affect
= attractive)
mass/charge
(2k/m) only rate from infinity
of boiling B1
A1
B1
electric
orω both
= 2 forces
have
πf zerocanpotential
be attractive or repulsive
at infinity B1
B1
C1
(b) (i)use
3 (a) formeanof a = square
– ω 2x clear
gravitational, speed
work got out as masses come together B1 [1] C1
f = (1/2 π)√(2 x 300)/0.240) 2 B1
(b) gravitational
either ω = forces are
√(2k/m) or ω(always = (2k/m) attractive)
/mass moves from infinity B1
B1
B1
(ii) =mean
7.96 ≈kinetic
8 Hz energy = ½m<c 2
> M1 A0 [4
for
electric
ω = 2 πfelectric,
forces work can done
be on charges
attractive or if same
repulsive sign, work got out if opposite sign as charges B1
C1
(b) forcome =together
gravitational, work got outleading
as masses come together B1 [4
f (i)=ρ(1/2 Nm/V
resonance
π)√(2
2 xand algebra
300)/0.240) to [do not allow if takes N = 1] M1 B1
B1 [1
½m<c > = 3/2 kT /mass moves from infinity A0 [2] B1
2 (a) for (i)= 7.96 idea≈ 8ofHz heat lost on (bycharges
oil) = heat gained (by work
thermometer) A0
C1
(ii)electric,
8 Hzwork done if same sign, got out if opposite sign as charges B1 [1
32 x 1.4 x -27 (54 – t) = 12 x 0.18 x (t – 19) C1
(c) (i)come
(b) (i) ½ × together
resonance
t 6.6
= 52.4°C× 10 × (1.1 ×104)2 = 3/2 × 1.38 × 10-23 ×T C1 B1
B1
A1 [3
(c) (increase amount 4 of) damping B1
2 (a) (i) T
without
= 1.9
idea ×
altering
10
of heat Klostm(by
(k or) oil) = heat
…(some gained
indirect (by thermometer)
reference is acceptable)
A1 [2] C1
B1
(ii)
(ii)
8either
Hz ratio (= 1.6/54) = 0.030 or (=1.6/327) = 0.0049
B1 [1
A1
sensible 32 suggestion
x 1.4 x (54 – t) = 12 x 0.18 x (t – 19) C1
B1 [3
(ii) Nott =all52.4°C
atoms of) have same speed/kinetic energy B1 [1] A1
8 4 (b)
Q8-
(c) (increase
thermistor
(a) without
(i) GMm
amount
thermometer
{(R + h 1 )
damping
–1
–(allow
(R + ‘resistance
h ) –1
} thermometer’)
2 indirect reference is acceptable)
B1
B1
B1
because altering
small (k or)
2 m …(some
2 mass/thermal capacity B1 [2
B1
(ii)
sensible ½m
either {vratio
1 – v(=
suggestion 2 }1.6/54) = 0.030 or (=1.6/327) = 0.0049 B1
A1
B1 [2
3 (a)
(c) (thermal)
boiling point energy/heat
temperature
–11 is required
constant
6 –1 to convert unit mass/1 kg of M1
Q8- 4 (b)(b) thermistor
(a) 2M x 6.67
(i) GMm x {(R
10
thermometer + {(26.28
h ) – x 10
–1 (allow
(R + ‘resistance
h x 106)–1} = 53702 – 50902
) )–1–} (29.08 thermometer’) B1
B1
B1
solid
further to
comment liquid –19 1 6 2 M1
M x 4.888
because ½m x 10
small
{v v2=2}would
2.929 x 10
2 mass/thermal
–bulb capacity C1
B1
B1 [2
e.g. with no
heating
M = 6.00 x 10 kg change
1of24 in temperature/at
affect only rate melting
of boilingpoint A1 [2] A1
A1 [3
(c) boiling
(If equationpoint temperature
in (a) {(26.28 is
–11 is dimensionally constant
6 –1 unsound, then 0/3 marks2in (b), if 2dimensionally sound but
6 –1 M1
3 (b)
(a) (i)2M
(b)
xof6.67
useenergy ω 2–19
a = x–required
10 x clear to
x 10
warm
) – (29.08 x 10 -3 ) } = 53703 – 5090
6ice = 24 × 10 × 2.1 × 10 × 15 (= 756 J) C1 C1B1
further
M incorrect,
x 4.888 comment
treat as e.c.f.) 2 x 10
either ω =x√(2k/m)
10 = or 2.929 = (2k/m) B1C1
e.g. heating
Mω =energy
6.00 x of24bulb
required
10 kg toωmelt
would affect
iceonly at 0rate
°C = of 24 × 10-3 × 330 × 103 (= 7920 J) C1
boiling A1
A1
5 (a) (i) total πf
= 2 (induced) e.m.f proportional/equal to rate of change of flux (linkage) C1
B1
(If equation energyin 2(a)=is8700 J
dimensionally unsound, then 0/3 marks in (b), if dimensionally A1sound[3]but
3 (a) f = of
use (1/2 =π)√(2
a(allow
– ω‘induced clear voltage, induced p.d.)
xx 300)/0.240) B1C1
incorrect, treat as e.c.f.) 2
=
either 7.96ωflux≈
= is
8 cust
Hz
√(2k/m) as orthe ω disc
= moves
(2k/m) -3 3 M1
A0B1 [4
(ii) energy hence lost by warm
inducing water = 200 × 10 × 4.2 × 10 × (28 - T)
an e.m.f C1 A0 [2
5 (a) (i)
ω = 2 πf
(induced)
Page(i)2 200resonance e.m.f proportional/equal to rate of change of flux (linkage) C1
Paper B1B1
(b) × 4.2 × (28 - T) = 24Mark × 4.2Scheme × T + 8676 SyllabusC1 [1
f (ii)
= (1/2 π)√(2
(allow ‘induced
x 300)/0.240)
discGCE voltage,
is notA/AS induced
LEVELof–cutting p.d.)
May/June 2007 of disc not9702 B1
T =field 16in°C uniform/rate not same/speed same (over [3] 04
A1 whole
= 7.96
(ii)[allowflux
8 ≈
Hz
disc)is
8 cust
Hz as the disc moves B1M1
A0 [1
2 marks if ∆ calculated]
Te.m.f
Q9- 1 Page
(a) (region
2 [allow
hence
so space)
2
inducing
of different
markswhere e.m.f.’san
(24 axinmass
if damping different
4.2Mark parts of disc
x experiences
T)Scheme
omitted] a force Syllabus [1]A0
B1Paper M1
(b)
(c) (i) (increase resonance
amount
lead to eddy currents of) B1
A0B1 [2
(ii) [allow
without field 1inmark
altering disc (kGCEfornot
is
or) m A/AS
224 LEVEL
x 4.2
uniform/rate
…(some xindirect
(28 May/June
of–-cutting
T) = 8676, is 2007
T - 19 °C]of disc not9702
not same/speed
reference acceptable) same (over whole04 B1
(b)
(b) (i)(ii)
sensible
eddy 8 Hz
disc) suggestion
currents
potential dissipate
energy thermal energy
= (–)GMm / x in disc C1 B1B1 [3
Q9- 1 (a) (region energy soof
∆EPderiveddifferent
space)
=amount
GMm/2R e.m.f.’s
where
from oscillation
– ain
GMm/3R different
mass parts
experiences
of–1disc of disca force M1B1 B1M1
[1]
–1
4 (c)
(a) (increase
(i)
energy GMm
lead to {(Reddy
of disc2 depends + of)
h ) damping
–
currents
1 (R + h
on amplitude2 ) } of oscillations B1
B1
B1
A0 [3
without = GMm/6R
altering
½m {v1 –(kv2or) 2 m …(some indirect reference is acceptable)
}
A0 [2]
B1B1 [2
(b) (i)sensible
(b) eddy potential suggestion
currents dissipate
energy thermal
2 = (–)GMm 2 energy / x in disc 6 –1 C1 B1
(b) (ii) 2M
energy E
x =
K6.67
∆EPderived
½mx
= GMm/2R 10 (7600
–11
{(26.28 – 7320
from oscillation
– GMm/3Rx 10 6) –1
) –
of disc (29.08 x 10 ) } = 5370 2
– 5090 2 M1
M1 B1B1
–196)m –1
4 (a) M x=4.888
(i)
energy (2.09
GMm x×
of disc 1010
{(R += h12.929
depends ) –on (R + h6 2)–1} of oscillations
xamplitude
10 © UCLES 2006 A0 [1]
C1B1
B1
= GMm/6R
½mx{v10 224 2 A0 [2]
M = 6.00 1 – kg v2 } A1B1 [3
(If equation in6(a) is 2dimensionally 2 unsound, then 0/3 marks in (b), if dimensionally sound but
(c) (ii)
(b) (i)
2M E = ½m
K6.67
x2.09
incorrect, ×treat
x10 10(7600
–11
=6 (6.67
as {(26.28
e.c.f.)
– 7320
× x10 106))–1
–11
M)/(6 × 3.4x ×
– (29.08 10106 –16
) )} = 53702 – 50902 C1M1 B1
= (2.09 × –19 )m
10 23 6 A0 [1]
M xM 4.888= 6.39x 10× 10= 2.929 kg x 10 © UCLES 2006 A1 C1
[2]
CEDAR 5 COLLEGE
(a) M (i)= 6.00 x 10 kg
(induced)
24
e.m.f proportional/equal to rate of change of flux (linkage) 54 B1A1
(ii) e.g.(allow
(If equation no©in ‘induced
(a)
energy is
University
6
voltage,
dimensionally
dissipated
of induced
Cambridgedue to p.d.)
unsound, then
friction
International 0/3
with marks in (b),
atmosphere/air
Examinations if
2005dimensionally sound but
(c) (i)incorrect,
2.09
rocket ×treat
flux 10
is
is cust = (6.67
as
outsideas the
e.c.f.) 10–11
×disc
atmospheremoves M)/(6 × 3.4 × 106) C1 M1
23
M = 6.39
hence × 10
inducing kg
not influenced by another planet etc.an e.m.f A1
B1 [1][2]
A0 [2
f = (1/2 π)√(2‘induced
(allow voltage, induced p.d.)
x 300)/0.240) B1
flux≈ is
= 7.96 cust as the disc moves
8 Hz M1
A0 [
hence inducing an e.m.f A0
Page(i)2
(b) resonance Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper B1 [
(ii) field in discGCEis notA/AS LEVELof–cutting
uniform/rate May/June 2007
not same/speed of disc not9702
same (over whole04
(ii) 8 Hz
disc) B1 [
Q9-9 1 (a) (region so of different e.m.f.’sainmass
space) where different parts of disc
experiences a force B1 M1
[1]
(c) (increase
leadamount
to eddyof) damping
currents B1
A0
without altering (k or) m …(some indirect reference is acceptable) B1
(b) (i)sensible
(b) eddy suggestion
currents
potential dissipate
energy thermal energy
= (–)GMm / x in disc C1 B1 [
energy
∆EPderived
= GMm/2R from oscillation
– GMm/3R of disc M1 B1
4 (a) (i)
energy GMm
of disc + h1)–1 –on
{(Rdepends + h2)–1} of oscillations
(Ramplitude B1
B1
= GMm/6R 2
½m {v1 – v2 } 2 A0 [2]
B1 [
2 2
(b) (ii)
2M E = ½m
x K6.67 x 10(7600
–11
6
– 7320
{(26.28 x 106))–1 – (29.08 x 106)–1} = 53702 – 50902 M1 B1
–19
(2.09x ×1010 )m 6
M x=4.888 = 2.929 x 10 © UCLES 2006 A0 [1]
C1
M = 6.00 x 1024 kg A1 [
(If equation in6(a) is dimensionally–11
unsound, then 0/3
6
marks in (b), if dimensionally sound but
2.09 ×treat
(c) (i)incorrect, 10 as e.c.f.) × 10 M)/(6 × 3.4 × 10 )
= (6.67 C1
M = 6.39 × 1023 kg A1 [2]
5 (a) (i) (induced) e.m.f proportional/equal to rate of change of flux (linkage) B1
(ii) e.g.(allow ‘induced
no energy voltage, induced
dissipated due to p.d.)
friction with atmosphere/air
flux is cust as the disc
rocket is outside atmosphere moves M1
Page 2 nothence inducing
influenced byan e.m.f planet etc.
another
Mark Scheme Syllabus B1Paper A0
[1] [
(ii) GCE
field A/AS
in disc LEVEL
is not – October/November
uniform/rate 2008 of disc not
of cutting not same/speed 9702
same (over whole 04
2 disc) bonds between molecules are broken/weakened
(a) (on melting,) B1
Section A so different e.m.f.’s in different
or molecules further apart/are able parts of disc
to slide over one another B1 M1
lead to eddy currents A0 [
10 1 (a)kinetic
Q10- energy unchanged so no temperature change
(i) F = GMm / R2
B1
B1 [1]
(b) potential energy
eddy currents increased/changed
dissipate thermal energyso energy required
in disc B1 [3]
B1
energy
(ii) F derived
= mRω2from oscillation of disc B1 B1[1]
energy of disc depends on amplitude of oscillations B1 [
(b) thermal energy/heat required to convert unit mass of solid to liquid M1
(iii)noreaction
with changeforce = GMm / R2at–its
in temperature/ mRω 2
(allow
normal e.c.f.)
boiling point A1B1 [2][1]
© UCLES 2006
(c)(b)(i) (i)thermal
either energy
value oflost byexpression
R in Rω×2 4.2
water = 0.16 x 100
varies
= or
67.2 kJmRω2 no longer parallel to GMm / R2 / normal to surface C1B1
67.2
becomes × L as object approaches a pole / is zero at pole
= 0.205smaller C1B1 [2]
L = 328 kJ kg–1 A1 [3]
(ii)(ii)more
1. acceleration 6.4 × 106 ×melts
energy (than=calculated) (2π / {8.6 4 2
ice × 10 }) M1C1
–2
= 0.034
so, (calculated) L is m s the accepted value
lower than A1A1 [2][2]
2. acceleration = 0 A1 [1]
3 (a) field strength = potential gradient M1

(c)correct
e.g. ‘radius’
sign ORof directions
planet varies
discussed A1 [2]
density of planet not constant
planet spinning
2 2
(b) area isnearby
21.2 cm ± 0.4/ cm
planets stars C2
(if outside 0.4 cm2 comments,
(any±sensible but within ±10.8 cm2each,
mark , allowmaximum
1 mark) 2) B2 [2]
1.0 cm represents (1.0 × 10 × 2.5 × 103 =) 25 V
2 –2
C1
potential difference = 530 V A1 [4]
2 (a) (Thermal) energy / heat required to convert unit mass of solid to liquid M1
at its normal melting point / without any change in temperature A1 [2]
(c) ½mv2 = qV GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9702 04
(reference to 1 kg or to ice → water scores max 1 mark)
½ × 9.1 × 10–31 × v2 = 1.6 × 10–19 × 530 C1
v = 1.37 × 107 ms–1 Section A A1 [2]
Q11- 1 (b) (i) To

(a) force permake mass (ratiofor
unit allowance heat
idea gains from the atmosphere
essential) B1 B1 [1]
[1]
(d) (i) d = 0 B1 [1]
(ii) e.g. constant rate of production of droplets from funnel
(b) g acceleration
(ii) = constant
GM / R2 massdecreases
of waterthen increases
collected per minute in beaker B1 C1
some
(any quantitative
sensible analysis
7 2 suggestion,
8.6 × (0.6 × 10 ) = M × 6.67 × 10 (e.g.
1 minimum
mark)
–11 at 4.0 cm) B1B1 C1 [2][1]
(any suggestion
M = 4.6 × 10 kg 24 that acceleration becomes zero or that there is a A1 [3]
(iii)deceleration
mass melted scores 0/2) in 5 minutes = 64.7 – ½ × 16.6 = 56.4 g
by heater C1
56.4 × 10–3 × L = 18 C1
CEDAR COLLEGE
(c) (i) L either kJ kg–1 decreases as© distance
= 320potential UCLES 2007 from planet decreases 55
A1 [3]
–1
(Use
or of m = 64.7, giving L = 278
potential zero at infinity andkJ X
kgis ,closer
scorestomax
zero1 mark
–1
use
or of m = 48.1, giving L = 374 kJ kg
potential α –1/r and Y more negative , scores max 2 marks) M1
so point Y is closer to planet. A1 [2]
2 (a) (Thermal) energy / heat required to convert unit mass of solid to liquid M1
at its normal melting point / without any change in temperature A1 [2]
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 9702 04
(reference to 1 kg or to ice → water scores max 1 mark)
Section A
11 1
Q11- (b) (i) To
(a) force make
per mass (ratiofor
unit allowance heat
idea gains from the atmosphere
essential) B1 B1 [1]
[1]
(ii) e.g. constant rate of production of droplets from funnel
(b) g = constant
GM / R2 mass of water collected per minute in beaker C1
(any
8.6 × (0.6sensible
× 107 )2 suggestion,
= M × 6.67 ×1 10
mark)
–11 B1 C1 [1]
24
M = 4.6 × 10 kg A1 [3]
(iii) mass melted by heater in 5 minutes = 64.7 – ½ × 16.6 = 56.4 g C1
56.4 × 10–3 × L = 18 C1
(c) (i) L either kJ kg–1 decreases as distance from planet decreases
= 320potential A1 [3]
–1
(Use
or of potential
m = 64.7,zero
giving L = 278and
at infinity kJ X
kgis ,closer
scorestomax
zero1 mark
–1
use
or of m = 48.1, αgiving
potential L = 374
–1/r and kJ kg
Y more , scores max 2 marks)
negative M1
so point Y is closer to planet. A1 [2]
3 (a) (ii)
acceleration
idea of ∆φ/ force
= ½v(directly)
2 proportional to displacement M1C1
and (6.8
either directed7 towards
– 5.3) × 10 = ½v 2 fixed point
Page 2 v or= acceleration

103 ms
5.5 × Mark &–1 displacement in opposite directions
Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus PaperA1 A1 [2]
[2]
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 2009 9702 41
2 (b) (i) maximum

(a) either / minimum
the half-life of theheight 8ismm
source/Sectionveryabovelong cloth / 14 mm below cloth
A B1 [1]
12 1
Q12- (a) F or
or
∝ Mm
(ii) 1. a/ R
decay
=2
constant is very small
…..…(words
11 mm or explained symbols) ................................................M1 A1 [1]
half-life >> 40 days
either M and
or 2. ω decay m are point masses
= 2πf constant << 0.02 day–1 C1 B1 [1]
or R >> diameter
= 2π × 4.5 of masses …(do not allow ‘size’) ....................................... A1 [2]
= 28.3 rad s–1 (do not allow 1 s.f.) A1 [2]
6
(b) number of helium atoms = 3.5 × 10 × 40 × 24 × 3600 C1
(b) (i) equatorial orbit ....................................................................................................
13 B1
= 1.21 × 10
period 24 hours / same angular speed ............................................................... B1
either pV =toNkT
from west east /orsame
pV direction
= nRT and n = N2008
© rotation
of UCLES / .....................................................
NA B1 [3]C1
5 13 –23
1.5 × 10one
(allow × Vof =the1.21
last × 10marks
two × 1.38
for × 10 ×overhead’
‘always 290 nd rd
if 2 or 3 marks not scored)
V = 3.2 × 10–13 m3 A1 [3]
(if uses T/°C or n = 1 or n = 4, then
(ii) gravitational force provides centripetal force 1 mark max for calculation of number of
atoms)
/ gives rise to centripetal acceleration ….(in ‘words’) ........................................ B1
GM / x2 = xω2 ....................................................................................................M1
g = GM / R2 .......................................................................................................M1
2
3 (a) increasing
to give gR = x3ω2 of
separation molecules / breaking bonds between molecules
............................................................................................ A0 B1
[3]
(allow atoms/molecules, overcome forces)
(iii) doing
ω = work against
2π / (24 atmosphere
× 3600) 10-5 rad expansion)
= 7.27 × (during s-1 ........................................................ C1 B1 [2]
6 2 3 -5 2
9.81 × (6.4 × 10 ) = x × (7.27 × 10 ) ............................................................. C1
x3 = 7.6 × 1022
× 107 m
(b) (i)x =1 4.2either bubbles produced at a constant rate / mass evaporates/lostA1at [3]
.................................................................................................
(use of g = 10 m s-2, loses
constant rate
1 mark but once only in the Paper)
or find mass loss more than once and this rate should be constant
or temperature of liquid remains constant [Total: 11]
B1 [1]
2 to allow/cancel out/eliminate/compensate for heat losses (to atmosphere) B1 [1]
(do not allow ‘prevent’/‘stop’)
2
(a)Page
either
3 pV = NkT orMark pV =Scheme:
nRT andTeachers’ n = N / Nversion
A .....................................................
Syllabus C1
Paper
clear correct
(ii) use ofsubstitution
power GCE × time e.g.
AS/A = mass
LEVEL ×
– specific
May/June latent
2010 heat 9702 41 C1
5 3 -6 -23
2.5 × 10 (70× –4.5
50) × 10
× 5 ×× 10
60 == (13.6
N × 1.38– × 10
6.5) × L × 290 ...............................................M1 C1
23
Q13- 4 (a)N ability
= 2.8 10
Lto×=do work
845 g–1
J.......................................................................................................... A0B1 [2]
A1 [3]
(allow
as a 1result
markoffor thecalculation
position/shape,of n = 0.467
etc. of mol)
an object B1 [2]
1 ∆E=gpe(1.2 =× 10
(b)(b)(i)(i) volume GMm ) × 2.8 × 1023 or 4 πr3 × 2.8 × 1023 .............................. C1C1
-10 3 / r
= (6.67
-7
× 10–11 × {2 × 1.663× 10–27}2-7) / (3.8
3 3
× 10–15) C1
= 4.8 = 1.93m× 10–49 J
× 10 2.53 × 10 m ..................................... A1A1 [2][3]
3 3
(ii) either
2 ∆E 4.5 × 10= cm
Qq />>
4πε0.48 cm3 or ratio of volumes is about 10-4 ................ B1C1
epe 0r © UCLES 2009
justified because
= volume
(1.6 × 10of–19molecules is negligible
)2 / (4π × 8.85 ...........................................
× 10–12 × 3.8 × 10–15) B1C1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE = 6.06 × 10 J –14 56 [3]
A1
[Total: 6]
(ii) idea that 2EK = ∆Eepe – ∆Egpe B1
EK = 3.03 × 10–14 J
from2 infinity to the point
Page Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus A1 [2]
Paper
(b) (i) at R, φ = 6.3 × 107 J kg–1 (allow ±Section

0.1 × 10A7
) B1
φ = GM / R
Q14-13 1 (a) work6.3done 7
× 10moving
= (6.67 10–11 × M) / (6.4 × 106)
unit× mass M1
C1
from 24
Minfinity
= 6.0to the point
× 10 kg (allow 5.95 → 6.14) A1 [3]
A1 [2]
Maximum of 2/3 for any value chosen for φ not at R
(b)(ii)(i) change 6.3 × 107=J 2.1

at R, φ in= potential kg–1×(allow
107 J ±kg0.1–1 × 10 )
7
(allow ± 0.1 × 107) B1
C1
φ =inGM
loss / R energy = gain in kinetic energy
potential B1
2107 = (6.67 × 10–11 6
½ mv = φ m or ½ mv 2 =×GM
6.3 × M) // (6.4
3R × 10 ) C1
C1
24
½Mv 2= =6.0 × 107kg (allow 5.95 → 6.14)
× 10
2.1 A1 [3]
vMaximum
= 6.5 × 10 of32/3
m sfor –1 any value chosen for φ not at R
………..……(allow 6.3 → 6.6) A1 [4]
(answer 7.9 × 103 m s–1, based on x = 2R, allow max 3 marks)
(ii) change in potential = 2.1 × 107 J kg–1 (allow ± 0.1 × 107) C1
(iii) e.g. lossspeed
in potential
/ velocity energy = gain inwould
/ acceleration kineticbe
energy
greater B1
B1
2 2
½ mv = φ m or ½
deviates / bends from straight path mv = GM / 3R C1
B1 [2]
2
½ v sensible
(any = 2.1 ×ideas, 107 1 each, max 2)
v = 6.5 × 103 m s–1 ………..……(allow 6.3 → 6.6) A1 [4]
(answer 7.9 × 103 m s–1, based on x = 2R, allow max 3 marks)
2 (a) (i) reduction in energy (of the oscillations) (B1)
(iii) reduction
e.g. speed in /amplitude
velocity / /acceleration
energy of oscillations
would be greater (B1)
B1
due to force
deviates (always)
/ bends fromopposing motion / resistive forces
straight path (B1)
B1 [2]
[2]
Page 2any (any two of the above,
sensible ideas, 1max
Mark Scheme: each, 2 max 2)
Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
(ii) amplitude is decreasing (very) gradually / oscillations would
2 (a) (i) continuereduction (for
in aenergy
long time) (of the/many oscillations
oscillations)
Section A M1
(B1)
light damping
reduction in amplitude / energy of oscillations A1 [2]
(B1)
14
Q15- 1 (a) gravitational due to force force (always)
provides opposing motion /force
the centripetal resistive forces (B1)
B1 [2]
any 2two of the 2 above, max 2
Page GMm/r = mrω (must be in terms of ω)
2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus B1
Paper
(b) (i)r 3ωfrequency
2
= GM and =
GCEGM 1 / 0.3
AS/A is aLEVEL
constant – October/November 2011 9702 B1
41 [3]
(ii) amplitude is = decreasing
3.3 Hz (very) gradually / oscillations would A1 [1]
allow
continuepoints taken
(for a long from time
time) axis giving
/many f = 3.45
oscillations
Section A Hz M1
(b) (i) light 1. damping
for Phobos, ω 2= 2π/(7.65 × 3600) A1
C1 [2]
Q15- 1 (a) (ii) gravitational
energy = ½ mv
force =and
provides 2.28 v ×=centripetal
the 10ωa
–4
2
rad s–1force –2 2 C1 B1
2 2 6× 30.065 × (2π –4 2
GMm/r (9.39 = mrω= ½
× 10(must) × (2.28be in×terms /0.3)
10 ) of×=ω) 6.67× ×1010–11
(1.5 ) ×M M1C1B1
(b) (i)r 3ωfrequency
2
=M GM= and= = 1
3.2
6.46GM / 0.3
mJ
× 10 23
is a kgconstant A0A1
B1 [2][3]
[3]
= 3.3 Hz A1 [1]
allow points taken from time axis giving f = 3.45 Hz
2. (9.39 × 106)3 × (2.28 × 10–4)2 = (1.99 × 107)3 × ω2 C1
(c) (b)amplitude
(i) 1. reduces 7.30exponentially
ωfor= Phobos, × 10ω–52=rad s–1/ does
2π/(7.65 not decrease linearly
× 3600) M1C1
C1
(ii)willenergy
so be not be 0.7 = ½cm mv =and v
2.28 ×× 10= ωa
10 )2rad s–1
–4
–5 C1 [2]
A1
T = 2π/ω 6= 3 2π/(7.30 –2 2
(9.39
= 8.6
= ½
× 10× 10
×) ×s(2.28 × 10–4)2 ×= (1.5
0.065
4 × (2π /0.3) 6.67× ×1010–11
) ×M M1C1
= 3.2 mJ 23 A0A1 [2][3]
M==23.6 6.46hours× 10 kg A1 [3]
6 3
2. (9.39
(ii) either almost ) × (2.28 × 10–4)2 = (1.99 × 107)3 × ω2
× 10‘geostationary’ C1
(c) amplitude reduces exponentially
10–5 rad
= 7.30 ×would –1/ does not decrease linearly M1C1
or ω satellite takes a long time to cross the sky B1 [1]
so will be not be 0.7 cm A1 [2]
T = 2π/ω = 2π/(7.30 × 10–5)
4
= 8.6 × 10 s
2 (a) e.g. moving in = random
23.6 hours (rapid) motion of molecules/atoms/particles A1 [3]
no intermolecular forces of attraction/repulsion
either almost
(ii) volume ‘geostationary’
of molecules/atoms/particles negligible compared to volume of
container
or satellite would take a long time to cross the sky B1 [1]
© UCLES 2010
time of collision negligible to time between collisions
(1 each, max 2) B2 [2]
2 (a) e.g. moving in random (rapid) motion of molecules/atoms/particles
(b) (i) 1.volume numberof ofmolecules/atoms/particles
(gas) molecules negligible compared to volume of B1 [1]
container
2.timemean
of collision
squarenegligible
speed/velocity© UCLES
to time gas2010
(ofbetween collisions
molecules) B1 [1]
(1 each, max 2) B2 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
(ii) either pV = NkT or pV = nRT and links n and k 57
and <EK> = ½m<c2> M1
(b) (i) 1. number of (gas) molecules 3 B1 [1]
clear algebra leading to <EK> = kT A1 [2]
Section A
15 1
Q16- (a) force is proportional to the product of the masses and
inversely proportional to the square of the separation M1
(b) (i) gravitational force provides the centripetal force B1

mv2/r = GMm/r2 and EK = ½mv2 M1
hence EK = GMm/2r A0 [2]
(ii) 1. ∆EK = ½ × 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1) C1

(allow 1.0 × 108 J if evidence that EK evaluated separately for each r)
2. ∆EP = 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1) C1

(allow 1.8 or 1.9 × 108 J)
(iii) either (7.30 × 106)–1 – (7.34 × 106)–1 or ∆EK is positive / EK increased M1

2 (a) (i) sum of potential energy and kinetic energy of atoms / molecules / particles M1
reference to random Section A A1 [2]
161 (a) Page 3 orbit / above equator Mark Scheme
equatorial Syllabus Paper
B1
(ii) no intermolecular
GCE west forces
AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9702 B143
satellite
no moves from
potential energy to east / same direction as Earth spins B1
B1
periodinternal
is 24 hours / same period as spinning of Earth B1 [3]
Q17- 3  (a)
(allow mark
energy
(i) 1 (tangent
for to is kinetic
line
‘appearsgives)
to
energy (ofofrandom
direction
be force onmotion)
stationary/overhead’ a (small
if
oftest)
none
molecules
of mass marks scored) B1B1 [3][1]
above
(ii) (tangent to line gives) direction of force on a (small test) charge M1
charge is positive A1 [2]
(b) gravitational
(b) kinetic 2energy force provides/is the centripetal
∝2 thermodynamic 2 temperature
2
force B1
B1
GMm/R = mRω or in
either temperature GMm/R
Celsius, = not /R
mv kelvin so incorrect M1
ωor= temperature
2π /T or v = 2πR in /
kelvinT or
is clear
not substitution
doubled M1
B1 [2]
(b) similarity:
clear working to give R3 = (GMT2 / 4π2) A1 [4]
e.g. radial fields
lines normal to surface
3 (a) temperature
3 greater of the spheres
separation of lines iswith
the same
increased2 distance from sphere B1
(c) Rno =(net) × 10–11 ×of6.0
6.67 transfer × 1024
energy × (24 × the
between 3600) / 4π2 2
spheres C1
B1 [2]
field strength ∝ 1 / (distance to centre of sphere)
=(allow
7.57 ×any 1022sensible answer) C1 B1
R = 4.2 × 107 m A1 [3]
(b) (missing out =
(i) difference:
power 3600m ×gives
c × ∆θ1.8 × 105mmisand
where scores
mass 2/3 marks)
per second C1
3800
e.g. = m × 4.2
gravitational × (42
force – 18) towards sphere
(always) C1B1
–1
m = 38 g s
electric force direction depends on sign of charge on sphere / towards or A1 [3]
2 (a) (i) away 1. pV from= nRTsphere B1
(ii) e.g.
some1.80 × 10–3 energy
thermal
gravitational 2.60 × is 105
×field/force is =
lost to nthe× 8.31 × 297
surroundings
attractive C1
M1
(B1)
so rate
n = 0.19
is an mol
overestimate
electric field/force is attractive or repulsive A1(B1)[2][2]
A1
(allow any sensible comparison) [3]
2. ∆q = mc∆T
4 (a) straight 95.0 line through
= 0.190 origin× 12.5 × ∆T M1
B1
shows acceleration
∆T = 40force
(c) gravitational K = 1.67 × 10–27
proportional to displacement
× 9.81 A1 [2]
A1
negative(allow
gradient –26 M1A1
2 marks = 1.6 × 10 answer
for correct N with clear logic shown)
–19
shows acceleration
electric force = 1.6 and displacement
× 10 × 270 / (1.8 × 10–2) directions
in opposite A1C1 [4]
–15
(ii) p/T = constant = 2.4 × 10 N A1
5
electric
(2.6 × 10 force very=much
) / 297 p / (297greater
+ 40)than gravitational force M1 B1 [4]
5
p = 2.95 × 10 Pa A0 [1]
4 (a) force on proton is normal to velocity and field M1
provides
(b) change centripetal
in internal energyforce (forJcircular
is 120 / 25 J motion) B1 A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 58
internal energy decreases / ∆U is negative / kinetic energy of molecules decreases M1
(b) magnetic force
so temperature = Bqv
lower A1 B1[3]
centripetal force = mrω2 or mv2/r B1
GCE A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9702 42
Section A
17 1 (a) gravitational force provides/is the centripetal force B1
GMm / r2 R mv2 / r M1
v R √(GM / r) A0 [2]
allow gravitational field strength provides/is the centripetal acceleration (B1)

GM / r2 R v2 / r (M1)
(b) (i) kinetic energy increase/change R loss / change in (gravitational) potential

energy B1
½mV0 2 R GMm / x C1
V0 2 R 2GM / x
V0 R √(2GM / x) A1 [3]
(max. 2 for use of r not x)
(ii) V0 is (always) greater than v (for x = r) M1

so stone could not enter into orbit A1 [2]
(expressions in (a) and (b)(i) must be dimensionally correct)
2 (a) use of kelvin temperatures B1

Page 2 both values of (V / T) correct (11.87),
Mark SchemeV / T is constant so pressure is constant
SyllabusM1 Paper
[2]
(allow use of n R1. Do not allow other values of n.)
Section A
(b) (i) work done R p∆V
181 (a) g = GM / R2 R 4.2 × 105 × (3.87 – 3.49) × 103 × 10–6 C1 C1
–11
= = 6.4J × 1023 ) / (3.4 × 106 )2 = 3.7 N kg–1
= == =(6.67 × 10 R ×160 A1 A1[2] [2]
(do not allow use of V instead of ∆V)

(b) ∆EP = mg∆h
(ii) increase
because ∆h !/ change in internal
R (or 1800 m ! 3.4energy m)heating
× 106 R of system
g is constant B1
∆EP = 2.4 × 3.7 × 1800 N work done on system C1 C1
= 1.6 × 10 J 4 R 565 – 160 A1 [3]
= = = = R 405 J A1 [2]
(use of g = 9.8 m s–2 max. 1 for explanation)
(c) internal energy R sum of kinetic energy and potential energy / EK N EP B1

(c) gravitational potential energy = (–)GMm / x C1
no intermolecular forces M1
v2 = 2GM / x C1
no potential energy (so ∆U R ∆EK) A1 [3]
x = 4D = 4 × 6.8 × 106 C1
2
3 = (2 × 6.67 × 10–11 × 6.4 × 1023 ) / (4 × 6.8 × 106 )
(a) vresonance B1 [1]
= 3.14 × 106
v = 1.8 × 103 m s–1 A1 [4]
(b) (use
Pt R of ∆θD giving 1.9 × 10 3 m s–1, allow max. 3)
mc3.5 C1
750 × 2 × 60 R 0.28 × c × (98 – 25) C1
c R 4400 J kg–1 K–1 A1 [3]
2 (a) (i) F = R cosθ M1
(useWof =∆θRRsinθ
73 N 273 max. 1 / 3) M1
(usedividing,
of t R 2 sWnot
= 120 s max. 2 / 3)
F tanθ A0 [2]
(max. 1 if derivation to final line not shown)
(ii) provides the centripetal force B1 [1]
(b) either F = mv2 / r and W = mg

CEDAR COLLEGE
or v2 = rg / tan θ 59
C1
v2 = (14 × 10–2 × 9.8) / tan 28° C1
= 2.58
v = 1.6 m s–1 A1 [3]
(c) q = mc∆θ
4.8 × 10–3 = 6.2 × 10–3 × 910 × ∆θ C1
∆θ = 8.5 × 10–4 K A1 [2]
192 (a) smooth curve with decreasing gradient, not starting at x = 0 M1

end of line not at g = 0 or horizontal A1 [2]
(b) straight line with positive gradient M1

line starts at origin A1 [2]
(c) sinusoidal shape B1

only positive values and peak / trough height constant B1
4 ‘loops’ B1 [3]
3 (a) initially, pV / T = (2.40 × 105 × 5.00 × 10–4) / 288 = 0.417 M1

finally, pV / T = (2.40 × 105 × 14.5 × 10–4) / 835 = 0.417 M1
ideal gas because pV / T is constant A1 [3]
(allow 2 marks for two determinations of V / T and then 1 mark for V / T and p
constant, so ideal)

Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9702 41
201 (a) (gravitational) potential at infinity defined as/is zero B1
(gravitational) force attractive so work got out/done as object moves from infinity
(so potential is negative) B1 [2]
(b) (i) ∆E = m∆φ © Cambridge International Examinations 2014

= 180 × (14 – 10) × 108 C1
= 7.2 × 1010 J A1
increase B1 [3]
(ii) energy required = 180 × (10 – 4.4) × 108

or
energy per unit mass = (10 – 4.4) × 108 C1
½ × 180 × v2 = 180 × (10 – 4.4) × 108

or
½ × v2 = (10 – 4.4) × 108 C1
v = 3.3 × 104 m s–1 A1 [3]
2 (a) e.g. time of collisions negligible compared to time between collisions
no intermolecular forces (except during collisions)
random motion (of molecules)
large numbers of molecules
(total) volume of molecules negligible compared to volume of containing vessel

or
average/mean separation large compared with size of molecules
CEDAR COLLEGE 60
any two B2 [2]
Section A
21
1 (a) (i) weight = GMm/r 2 C1
= (6.67 × 10–11 × 6.42 × 1023 × 1.40)/(½ × 6.79 × 106)2 C1
= 5.20 N A1 [3]
(ii) potential energy = –GMm/r C1

= –(6.67 × 10–11 × 6.42 × 1023 × 1.40)/(½ × 6.79 × 106) M1
= –1.77 × 107 J A0 [2]
(b) either ½mv 2 = 1.77 × 107 C1

v 2 = (1.77 × 107 × 2)/1.40 C1
v = 5.03 × 103 m s–1 A1
or ½mv 2 = GMm/r (C1)
v 2 = (2 × 6.67 x 10–11 × 6.42 × 1023)/(6.79 × 106/2) (C1)
v = 5.02 × 103 m s–1 (A1) [3]
3
(c) (i) ½ × 2 × 1.66 × 10–27 × (5.03 × 103)2 = × 1.38 × 10–23 × T C1
2
T = 2030 K A1 [2]
(ii) either because there is a range of speeds M1

some molecules have a higher speed A1
or some escape from point above planet surface (M1)
so initial potential energy is higher (A1) [2]
2 (a) temperature scale calibrated assuming linear change of property with

temperature B1
neither property varies linearly with temperature B1 [2]
(b) (i) does not depend on the property of a substance B1 [1]
(ii) temperature at which atoms have minimum/zero energy B1 [1]
(c) (i) 323.15 K A1 [1]
(ii) 30.00 K A1 [1]
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2011
CEDAR COLLEGE 61
A2
OSCILLATION 
CEDAR COLLEGE 62
CEDAR COLLEGE 63
May/June 2002 , Question #4 qp_4
CEDAR COLLEGE 64
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 65
CEDAR COLLEGE 66
CEDAR COLLEGE 67
CEDAR COLLEGE 68
CEDAR COLLEGE 69
CEDAR COLLEGE 70
Oct/June 2003 , Question #2 , qp_4
CEDAR COLLEGE 71
CEDAR COLLEGE 72
CEDAR COLLEGE 73
9 For
6 Examiner’s
Use
A student claims that the motion of the mass may be represented by the equation
y = y0sin t.
(a) Give two reasons why the use of this equation is inappropriate.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Determine the angular frequency of the oscillations.
angular frequency = .................................. rad s–1 [2]
(c) The mass is a lump of plasticine. The plasticine is now flattened so that its surface area
is increased. The mass of the lump remains constant and the large surface area is
horizontal.
The plasticine is displaced downwards by 1.5 cm and then released.
On Fig. 4.2, sketch a graph to show the subsequent oscillations of the plasticine. [3]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 74

6 For
7 Examiner’s
Use
3 The vibrations of a mass of 150 g are simple harmonic. Fig. 3.1 shows the variation with
displacement x of the kinetic energy Ek of the mass.
16
Ek / mJ
12
0
-6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6
x / cm
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, draw lines to represent the variation with displacement x of
(i) the potential energy of the vibrating mass (label this line P),
(ii) the total energy of the vibrations (label this line T).
[2]
(b) Calculate the angular frequency of the vibrations of the mass.
angular frequency = ......................................... rad s–1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 75
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The oscillations are now subject to damping.
(i) Explain what is meant by damping.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The mass loses 20% of its vibrational energy. Use Fig. 3.1 to determine the new
amplitude of oscillation. Explain your working.
amplitude = ............................................... cm [2]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 76
8 For
8 Examiner’s
Use
4 A tube, closed at one end, has a constant area of cross-section A. Some lead shot is placed
in the tube so that the tube floats vertically in a liquid of density ρ, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
tube, area of
cross-section A
liquid,
density
lead shot
Fig. 4.1
The total mass of the tube and its contents is M.

When the tube is given a small vertical displacement and then released, the vertical
acceleration a of the tube is related to its vertical displacement y by the expression
Aρg
a=– y,
M
where g is the acceleration of free fall.
(a) Define simple harmonic motion.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Show that the tube is performing simple harmonic motion with a frequency f given by
f=
1
2π ! AMρg .
[3]
 
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05
CEDAR COLLEGE 77
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows the variation with time t of the vertical displacement y of the tube in
another liquid.
3
y / cm
2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4
–1 t/s
–2
–3
Fig. 4.2
(i) The tube has an external diameter of 2.4 cm and is floating in a liquid of density
950 kg m–3. Assuming the equation in (b), calculate the mass of the tube and its
contents.
mass = ..................................... kg [3]
(ii) State what feature of Fig. 4.2 indicates that the oscillations are damped.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 78
8 For
9 Examiner’s
Use
4 The centre of the cone of a loudspeaker is oscillating with simple harmonic motion of
frequency 1400 Hz and amplitude 0.080 mm.
(a) Calculate, to two significant figures,
(i) the angular frequency of the oscillations,
= ………………………………. rad s–1 [2]
(ii) the maximum acceleration, in m s–2, of the centre of the cone.
acceleration = ……………………………….. m s–2 [2]
(b) On the axes of Fig. 4.1, sketch a graph to show the variation with displacement x of the
acceleration a of the centre of the cone.
0
0 x
[2]
Fig. 4.1
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 79
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/O/N/05
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) (i) State the value of the displacement x at which the speed of the centre of the cone
is a maximum.
x = ……………………………… mm [1]
(ii) Calculate, in m s–1, this maximum speed.
speed = ……………………………. m s–1 [2]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 80
8 For
10 Examiner’s
Use
4 A piston moves vertically up and down in a cylinder, as illustrated in Fig. 4.1.
cylinder
pivot
piston
pivot P
wheel
Fig. 4.1
The piston is connected to a wheel by means of a rod that is pivoted at the piston and at the
wheel. As the piston moves up and down, the wheel is made to rotate.
(a) (i) State the number of oscillations made by the piston during one complete rotation of
the wheel.
number = ………………………. [1]
(ii) The wheel makes 2400 revolutions per minute. Determine the frequency of
oscillation of the piston.
frequency = ………………………. Hz [1]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 81
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The amplitude of the oscillations of the piston is 42 mm.
Assuming that these oscillations are simple harmonic, calculate the maximum values
for the piston of
(i) the linear speed,
speed = …………………………. m s–1 [2]
(ii) the acceleration.
acceleration = …………………………. m s–2 [2]
(c) On Fig. 4.1, mark a position of the pivot P for the piston to have
(i) maximum speed (mark this position S), [1]

(ii) maximum acceleration (mark this position A). [1]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 82
6 For
11 Examiner’s
Use
3 Two vertical springs, each having spring constant k, support a mass. The lower spring is
attached to an oscillator as shown in Fig. 3.1.
mass
oscillator
Fig. 3.1
The oscillator is switched off. The mass is displaced vertically and then released so that it
vibrates. During these vibrations, the springs are always extended. The vertical acceleration
a of the mass m is given by the expression
ma = –2kx,
where x is the vertical displacement of the mass from its equilibrium position.
(a) Show that, for a mass of 240 g and springs with spring constant 3.0 N cm–1, the
frequency of vibration of the mass is approximately 8 Hz.
[4]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 83
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The oscillator is switched on and the frequency f of vibration is gradually increased. The
amplitude of vibration of the oscillator is constant.
Fig. 3.2 shows the variation with f of the amplitude A of vibration of the mass.
0
0
f
Fig. 3.2
State
(i) the name of the phenomenon illustrated in Fig. 3.2,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the frequency f0 at which maximum amplitude occurs.
frequency = ………………………… Hz [1]
(c) Suggest and explain how the apparatus in Fig. 3.1 could be modified to make the peak
on Fig. 3.2 flatter, without significantly changing the frequency f0 at which the peak
occurs.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 84
8 For
12 Examiner’s
Use
3 A spring is hung from a fixed point. A mass of 130 g is hung from the free end of the spring,
as shown in Fig. 3.1.
spring
mass 130 g
Fig. 3.1
The mass is pulled downwards from its equilibrium position through a small distance d and is
released. The mass undergoes simple harmonic motion.
Fig. 3.2 shows the variation with displacement x from the equilibrium position of the kinetic
energy of the mass.
3.0
kinetic energy / mJ
2.0
1.0
0
–1.0 –0.5 0 +0.5 +1.0
x / cm
Fig. 3.2
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 85
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07

9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(a) Use Fig. 3.2 to
(i) determine the distance d through which the mass was displaced initially,
d = ............................................ cm [1]
(ii) show that the frequency of oscillation of the mass is approximately 4.0 Hz.
[6]
(b) (i) On Fig. 3.2, draw a line to represent the total energy of the oscillating mass. [1]
(ii) After many oscillations, damping reduces the total energy of the mass to 1.0 mJ.
For the oscillations with reduced energy,
1. state the frequency,
frequency = .............................................Hz
2. using the graph, or otherwise, state the amplitude.
amplitude = ............................................ cm [2]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 86
13 8
3 The needle of a sewing machine is made to oscillate vertically through a total distance of For
22 mm, as shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
22 mm needle at its
maximum height
8.0 mm
cloth
Fig. 3.1
The oscillations are simple harmonic with a frequency of 4.5 Hz.

The cloth that is being sewn is positioned 8.0 mm below the point of the needle when the
needle is at its maximum height.
(a) State what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The displacement y of the point of the needle may be represented by the equation
y = a cos t.
(i) Suggest the position of the point of the needle at time t = 0.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Determine the values of
1. a,
a = .......................................... mm [1]
2. .
= ..................................... rad s–1 [2]

© UCLES 2008 9702/04/O/N/08
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 87
9
(c) Calculate, for the point of the needle, For

Examiner’s
(i) its maximum speed, Use
speed = ........................................ m s–1 [2]
(ii) its speed as it moves downwards through the cloth.
speed = ........................................ m s–1 [3]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 88
14 8
4 A vertical peg is attached to the edge of a horizontal disc of radius r, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
peg
disc
Fig. 4.1
The disc rotates at constant angular speed ω. A horizontal beam of parallel light produces a
shadow of the peg on a screen, as shown in Fig. 4.2.
screen
peg
R
Q
parallel beam θ
S
of light P
r
Fig. 4.2 (plan view)
At time zero, the peg is at P, producing a shadow on the screen at S.

At time t, the disc has rotated through angle θ. The peg is now at R, producing a shadow
at Q.
(a) Determine,
(i) in terms of ω and t, the angle θ,
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) in terms of ω, t and r, the distance SQ.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 89
9
(b) Use your answer to (a)(ii) to show that the shadow on the screen performs simple For
harmonic motion. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The disc has radius r of 12 cm and is rotating with angular speed ω of 4.7 rad s–1.
Determine, for the shadow on the screen,
(i) the frequency of oscillation,
frequency = ......................................... Hz [2]
(ii) its maximum speed.
speed = .................................... cm s–1 [2]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 90
15 8
4 The variation with time t of the displacement x of the cone of a loudspeaker is shown in For
Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
0.3
x / mm
0.2
0.1
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
t / ms
– 0.1
– 0.2
– 0.3
Fig. 4.1
(a) Use Fig. 4.1 to determine, for these oscillations,
(i) the amplitude,
amplitude = ........................................ mm [1]
(ii) the frequency.
frequency = .......................................... Hz [2]
(b) State two times at which
(i) the speed of the cone is maximum,
time ............................... ms and time ............................... ms [1]
(ii) the acceleration of the cone is maximum.
time ............................... ms and time ............................... ms [1]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 91
9
(c) The effective mass of the cone is 2.5 g. For

Examiner’s
Use your answers in (a) to determine the maximum kinetic energy of the cone. Use
kinetic energy = ............................................ J [3]
(d) The loudspeaker must be designed so that resonance of the cone is avoided.
(i) State what is meant by resonance.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State and briefly explain one other situation in which resonance should be
avoided.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................. [2]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 92
7
16
3 (a) State what is meant by For
Examiner’s
(i) oscillations, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) free oscillations,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) simple harmonic motion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two inclined planes RA and LA each have the same constant gradient. They meet at
their lower edges, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
ball
L R
Fig. 3.1
A small ball moves from rest down plane RA and then rises up plane LA. It then moves
down plane LA and rises up plane RA to its original height. The motion repeats itself.
State and explain whether the motion of the ball is simple harmonic.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 93
17 6
2 A long strip of springy steel is clamped at one end so that the strip is vertical. A mass of 65 g For
is attached to the free end of the strip, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
mass
springy 65 g
steel
clamp
Fig. 2.1
The mass is pulled to one side and then released. The variation with time t of the horizontal
displacement of the mass is shown in Fig. 2.2.
displacement
/ cm
1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
t/s
–1
–2
Fig. 2.2
The mass undergoes damped simple harmonic motion.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by damping.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
CEDAR COLLEGE 94
............................................................................................................................ [2]
Fig. 2.1
The mass is pulled to one side and then released. The variation with time t of the horizontal
displacement of the mass is shown in Fig. 2.2.
displacement
/ cm
1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
t/s
–1
–2
Fig. 2.2
The mass undergoes damped simple harmonic motion.
(a) (i) Explain what is meant by damping.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10
CEDAR COLLEGE 95
7
(ii) Suggest, with a reason, whether the damping is light, critical or heavy. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) (i) Use Fig. 2.2 to determine the frequency of vibration of the mass.
frequency = ......................................... Hz [1]
(ii) Hence show that the initial energy stored in the steel strip before the mass is
released is approximately 3.2 mJ.
[2]
(c) After eight complete oscillations of the mass, the amplitude of vibration is reduced from
1.5 cm to 1.1 cm. State and explain whether, after a further eight complete oscillations,
the amplitude will be 0.7 cm.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
96
18 8
3 A student sets up the apparatus illustrated in Fig. 3.1 in order to investigate the oscillations of For
a metal cube suspended on a spring. Examiner’s
Use
pulley
variable-frequency
oscillator
thread
spring
metal
cube
Fig. 3.1
The amplitude of the vibrations produced by the oscillator is constant.

The variation with frequency of the amplitude of the oscillations of the metal cube is shown
in Fig. 3.2.
20
15
amplitude
/ mm
10
0
2 4 6 8 10
frequency / Hz
Fig. 3.2
(a) (i) State the phenomenon illustrated in Fig. 3.2.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) For the maximum amplitude of vibration, state the magnitudes of the amplitude and
the frequency.
amplitude = ............................................. mm
frequency = ............................................... Hz
[1]
 
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10
CEDAR COLLEGE 97
9
(b) The oscillations of the metal cube of mass 150 g may be assumed to be simple For
harmonic. Examiner’s
Use your answers in (a)(ii) to determine, for the metal cube, Use
(i) its maximum acceleration,
acceleration = ...................................... m s–2 [3]
(ii) the maximum resultant force on the cube.
force = .......................................... N [2]
(c) Some very light feathers are attached to the top surface of the cube so that the feathers
extend outwards, beyond the vertical sides of the cube.
The investigation is now repeated.
On Fig. 3.2, draw a line to show the new variation with frequency of the amplitude of
vibration for frequencies between 2 Hz and 10 Hz. [2]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 98
8
19
3 A cylinder and piston, used in a car engine, are illustrated in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
cylinder
C D
A B
piston
Fig. 3.1
The vertical motion of the piston in the cylinder is assumed to be simple harmonic.
The top surface of the piston is at AB when it is at its lowest position; it is at CD when at its
highest position, as marked in Fig. 3.1.
(a) The displacement d of the piston may be represented by the equation
d = – 4.0 cos(220t )
where d is measured in centimetres.
(i) State the distance between the lowest position AB and the highest position CD of
the top surface of the piston.
distance = .......................................... cm [1]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 99
9
(ii) Determine the number of oscillations made per second by the piston. For
Examiner’s
Use
number = ................................................ [2]
(iii) On Fig. 3.1, draw a line to represent the top surface of the piston in the position
where the speed of the piston is maximum. [1]
(iv) Calculate the maximum speed of the piston.
speed = ..................................... cm s–1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 100

10
(b) The engine of a car has several cylinders. Three of these cylinders are shown For
in Fig. 3.2. Examiner’s
Use
X Y Z
C D
A B
Fig. 3.2
X is the same cylinder and piston as in Fig. 3.1.

Y and Z are two further cylinders, with the lowest and the highest positions of the top
surface of each piston indicated.
The pistons in the cylinders each have the same frequency of oscillation, but they are
not in phase.
At a particular instant in time, the position of the top of the piston in cylinder X is as
shown.
(i) In cylinder Y, the oscillations of the piston lead those of the piston in cylinder X by a
phase angle of 120° ( 23 p rad).
Complete the diagram of cylinder Y, for this instant, by drawing
1. a line to show the top surface of the piston, [1]
2. an arrow to show the direction of movement of the piston. [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 101

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/O/N/10
11
(ii) In cylinder Z, the oscillations of the piston lead those of the piston in cylinder X by a For
phase angle of 240° ( 43 p rad). Examiner’s
Use
Complete the diagram of cylinder Z, for this instant, by drawing
1. a line to show the top surface of the piston, [1]
2. an arrow to show the direction of movement of the piston. [1]
(iii) For the piston in cylinder Y, calculate its speed for this instant.
speed = ..................................... cm s–1 [2]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 102

6
20
3 (a) Define simple harmonic motion. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A tube, sealed at one end, has a total mass m and a uniform area of cross-section A.
The tube floats upright in a liquid of density ρ with length L submerged, as shown in
Fig. 3.1a.
tube
liquid
L
density ρ L+x
Fig. 3.1a Fig. 3.1b
The tube is displaced vertically and then released. The tube oscillates vertically in the
liquid.
At one time, the displacement is x, as shown in Fig. 3.1b.
Theory shows that the acceleration a of the tube is given by the expression
A ρg
a=– x.
m  
CEDAR COLLEGE 103

7
(i) Explain how it can be deduced from the expression that the tube is moving with For
simple harmonic motion. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The tube, of area of cross-section 4.5 cm2, is floating in water of density
1.0 × 103 kg m–3.
Calculate the mass of the tube that would give rise to oscillations of frequency 1.5 Hz.
12
mass = ............................................. g [4]
(d) (i) Name the phenomenon illustrated on your completed graph of Fig. 5.3. For
Examiner’s
............................................................................................................................ [1] Use
(ii) State one situation where the phenomenon named in (i) is useful.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 104

21 8
3 A bar magnet is suspended from the free end of a helical spring, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
helical
spring
magnet
coil
Fig. 3.1
One pole of the magnet is situated in a coil of wire. The coil is connected in series with a
switch and a resistor. The switch is open.
The magnet is displaced vertically and then released. As the magnet passes through its rest
position, a timer is started. The variation with time t of the vertical displacement y of the
magnet from its rest position is shown in Fig. 3.2.
2.0
y / cm
1.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
t /s
–1.0
–2.0
Fig. 3.2
At time t = 4.0 s, the switch is closed.

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 105

9
(a) Use Fig. 3.2 to For

Examiner’s
(i) state the evidence for the magnet to be undergoing free oscillations during the Use
period t = 0 to t = 4.0 s,
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) state, with a reason, whether the damping after time t = 4.0 s is light, critical or
heavy,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) determine the natural frequency of vibration of the magnet on the spring.
frequency = ........................................... Hz [2]
(b) (i) State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why, after time t = 4.0 s, the amplitude of vibration of the magnet is seen to
decrease.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [4]
 
CEDAR
© UCLES 2011 COLLEGE 9702/41/O/N/11
106
[Turn over
9
22
4 A small metal ball is suspended from a fixed point by means of a string, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
string
ball
Fig. 4.1
The ball is pulled a small distance to one side and then released. The variation with time t of
the horizontal displacement x of the ball is shown in Fig. 4.2.
6
x / cm
4
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 t /s 1.0
–2
–4
–6
Fig. 4.2
The motion of the ball is simple harmonic.
(a) Use data from Fig. 4.2 to determine the horizontal acceleration of the ball for a
displacement x of 2.0 cm.
acceleration = ....................................... m s–2 [3]

 
CEDAR
© UCLES 2012 COLLEGE 9702/41/M/J/12 [Turn over 107
10
(b) The maximum kinetic energy of the ball is EK. For

On the axes of Fig. 4.3, sketch a graph to show the variation with time t of the kinetic Examiner’s
energy of the ball for the first 1.0 s of its motion. Use
kinetic
energy
EK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 t /s 1.0
Fig. 4.3
[3]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 108

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12
6
23
2 A ball of mass 37 g is held between two fixed points A and B by two stretched helical springs, For
as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
ball
mass 37 g
A B
Fig. 2.1
The ball oscillates along the line AB with simple harmonic motion of frequency 3.5 Hz and
amplitude 2.8 cm.
(a) Show that the total energy of the oscillations is 7.0 mJ.
[2]
(b) At two points in the oscillation of the ball, its kinetic energy is equal to the potential
energy stored in the springs.
Calculate the magnitude of the displacement at which this occurs.
displacement = ............................................ cm [3]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 109

7
(c) On the axes of Fig. 2.2 and using your answers in (a) and (b), sketch a graph to show For
the variation with displacement x of Examiner’s
Use
(i) the total energy of the system (label this line T), [1]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the ball (label this line K), [2]
(iii) the potential energy stored in the springs (label this line P). [2]
energy
/ mJ
4
0
–3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3
x / cm
Fig. 2.2
(d) The arrangement in Fig. 2.1 is now rotated through 90° so that the line AB is vertical
and the ball oscillates in a vertical plane.
Suggest one form of energy, other than those in (c), that must be taken into consideration
when plotting new graphs to show energy changes with displacement.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 110

24 7
3 A mass of 78 g is suspended from a fixed point by means of a spring, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
spring
mass
78 g
Fig. 3.1
The stationary mass is pulled vertically downwards through a distance of 2.1 cm and then
released.
The mass is observed to perform simple harmonic motion with a period of 0.69 s.
(a) The mass is released at time t = 0.
For the oscillations of the mass,
(i) calculate the angular frequency ω,
ω = ...................................... rad s–1 [2]
(ii) determine numerical equations for the variation with time t of
1. the displacement x in cm,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. the speed v in m s–1.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
 

CEDAR COLLEGE 111
8
(b) Calculate the total energy of oscillation of the mass. For

Examiner’s
Use
energy = ............................................... J [2]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 112

© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13
25 10
4 (a) State what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A small ball rests at point P on a curved track of radius r, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
curved track,
radius r x
Fig. 4.1
The ball is moved a small distance to one side and is then released. The horizontal
displacement x of the ball is related to its acceleration a towards P by the expression
gx
a = −
r
where g is the acceleration of free fall.
(i) Show that the ball undergoes simple harmonic motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The radius r of curvature of the track is 28 cm.
Determine the time interval τ between the ball passing point P and then returning to
point P.
τ = ..................................................... s [3]
 
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/O/N/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 113
11
(c) The variation with time t of the displacement x of the ball in (b) is shown in Fig. 4.2.
0
0 t
2t 3t 4t
Fig. 4.2
Some moisture now forms on the track, causing the ball to come to rest after approximately
15 oscillations.
On the axes of Fig. 4.2, sketch the variation with time t of the displacement x of the ball for
the first two periods after the moisture has formed. Assume the moisture forms at time t = 0.
[3]
 
© UCLES 2014
CEDAR COLLEGE
9702/41/O/N/14 [Turn over
114
11
26
4 (a) For an oscillating body, state what is meant by
(i) forced frequency,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) natural frequency of vibration,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) resonance.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain one situation where resonance is useful.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) In some situations, resonance should be avoided.
State one such situation and suggest how the effects of resonance are reduced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 115

27 7
3 (a) State, by reference to displacement, what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A mass is undergoing oscillations in a vertical plane.
The variation with displacement x of the acceleration a of the mass is shown in Fig. 3.1.
0
0 x
Fig. 3.1
State two reasons why the motion of the mass is not simple harmonic.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 116

8
(c) A block of wood is floating in a liquid, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
oscillation
block of block
liquid
Fig. 3.2
The block is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is
shown in Fig. 3.3.
2.0
y / cm
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 t/s
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
Fig. 3.3
Use data from Fig. 3.3 to determine
(i) the angular frequency ω of the oscillations,
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

 
© UCLES 2016 9702/41/M/J/16
CEDAR COLLEGE 117
9
(ii) the maximum vertical acceleration of the block.
maximum acceleration = ............................................... m s−2 [2]
(iii) The block has mass 120 g.
The oscillations of the block are damped. Calculate the loss in energy of the oscillations
of the block during the first three complete periods of its oscillations.
energy loss = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 11]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 118

8
28
4 A metal block hangs vertically from one end of a spring. The other end of the spring is tied to a
thread that passes over a pulley and is attached to a vibrator, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
pulley vibrator
spring
block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The vibrator is switched off.

The metal block of mass 120 g is displaced vertically and then released. The variation with
time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is shown in Fig. 4.2.
y / cm 2
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
–1 /s
–2
–3
Fig. 4.2
For the vibrations of the block, calculate
(i) the angular frequency ω,
ω = ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 119

9
(ii) the energy of the vibrations.
energy = ...................................................... J [2]
(b) The vibrator is now switched on.
The frequency of vibration is varied from 0.7f to 1.3f where f is the frequency of vibration of
the block in (a).
For the block, complete Fig. 4.3 to show the variation with frequency of the amplitude of
vibration. Label this line A. [3]
amplitude
0
0.7 1.3
frequency
Fig. 4.3
(c) Some light feathers are now attached to the block in (b) to increase air resistance.
The frequency of vibration is once again varied from 0.7f to 1.3f. The new amplitude of
vibration is measured for each frequency.
On Fig. 4.3, draw a line to show the variation with frequency of the amplitude of vibration.
Label this line B. [2]
[Total: 9]
 

CEDAR COLLEGE 120
7
29
3 (a) State, by reference to displacement, what is meant by simple harmonic motion.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A mass is undergoing oscillations in a vertical plane.
The variation with displacement x of the acceleration a of the mass is shown in Fig. 3.1.
0
0 x
Fig. 3.1
State two reasons why the motion of the mass is not simple harmonic.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 121

8
(c) A block of wood is floating in a liquid, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
oscillation
block of block
liquid
Fig. 3.2
The block is displaced vertically and then released.
The variation with time t of the displacement y of the block from its equilibrium position is
shown in Fig. 3.3.
2.0
y / cm
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 2.0 2.4 t/s
–0.5
–1.0
–1.5
–2.0
Fig. 3.3
Use data from Fig. 3.3 to determine
(i) the angular frequency of the oscillations,
= ............................................. rad s−1 [2]

 
© UCLES 2016 9702/43/M/J/16
CEDAR COLLEGE 122

9
(ii) the maximum vertical acceleration of the block.
maximum acceleration = ............................................... m s−2 [2]
(iii) The block has mass 120 g.
The oscillations of the block are damped. Calculate the loss in energy of the oscillations
of the block during the first three complete periods of its oscillations.
energy loss = ...................................................... J [3]
[Total: 11]
 
CEDAR COLLEGE 123

ANSWERS
1
CEDAR COLLEGE 124

∆T = 143 K.......................................................................................C1
Page 2 temperature = 143 Mark+ 1340 = 1483 K................................................A1
Scheme Syllabus Paper[5]
A/AS LEVEL EXAMINATIONS - NOVEMBER 2003 9702 04
(c) e.g. thermocouple/resistance thermometer .................................. B1 [1]
4
1
3 (a) (i) radial
f0 is atlines....................................................................................
natural frequency of spring (system) ................................. B1 B1
pointing
this is at inwards
the driver ...........................................................................
frequency ....................................................... B1 [2]
(allow 1 mark for recognition that this is resonance)
(ii) no difference OR lines closer near surface of smaller sphere ...... B1 [3]
(b) line: amplitude 2
less at all frequencies ......................................... B1
(b) (i) FG = peak
GMm/R ..............................................................................
flatter .......................................................................... C1
B1
-11 24 3 2
= peak
(6.67 at X 10 x 5.98 x 10 )/(6380 x 10 )
f0 or slightly below f0 ................................................ B1 [3]
= 9.80 N ................................................................................. A1
(c) (aluminium) sheet cuts the magnetic flux/field.............................. B1
(ii) F mRω2 ....................................................................................
C = currents/e.m.f.
(so) induced in the (metal) sheet .......................... C1 B1
ω = 2π/T ......................................................................................
these currents dissipate energy ...................................................M1 C1
2
F C = (4π
less energy x 6380 x 103for
available )/8.64 104)2
thexoscillations ...................................... A1
so =amplitude
0.0337 N...............................................................................
smaller .................................................................... A1 A0 [4]
(‘current opposes motion of sheet’ scores one of the last two
(iii) F G - FC = 9.77 N............................................................................ A1
marks) [6]
4 (c)
(a) because acceleration
field causes forces on(of thefree fall) is .............................................M1
electrons (resultant) force per unit
mass .......................................................................................
and the nucleus in opposite directions ......................................... B1 A1
-2
(field causes) electrons (to be) stripped off the atom.................... B1
acceleration = 9.77 m s .............................................................. B1 [2]
[3]
5
2 (a)
(b) (i)
(i) E = and
a,ω x 0identified
Q/4!ε ………(-1 each error or omission) ................. B2
r2 .....................................................................................C1
20 x 103 x 102 = Q/(4! x 8.85 x 10-12 x 0.212 ....................................C1
(ii) (-)ve because a and x in opposite directions
charge = 9.8 x 10-6 C .......................................................................A1 [3]
OR a directed towards mean position/centre................................ B1 [3]
(b) (i) forces in springs are k(e + x) and k(e – x) .................................... C1

resultant = k(e + x)
© University – k(e – x) ......................................................M1
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
= 2kx ............................................................................ A0 [2]
(ii) F = ma ....................................................................................... B1
a = -2kx/m .................................................................................... A0
(-)ve sign explained...................................................................... B1 [2]
(iii) ω2 = 2k/m ..................................................................................... C1

(2πf)2 = (2 x 120)/0.90 .................................................................. C1
f = 2.6 Hz ..................................................................................... A1 [3]
(c) atom held in position by attractive forces

atom oscillates,
not just two forces OR 3D not 1D
force not proportional to x
any two relevant points, 1 each, max 2 ........................................ B2 [2]
 
3 (a) pV/T = constant............................................................................ C1
T = (6.5 x 106 x 30 x 300)/(1.1 x 105 x 540)................................. C1
= 985 K .................................................................................... A1 [3]
(if uses °C, allow 1/3 marks for clear formula)
3 (b) (i) ∆U = q + w
symbols identified correctly ..........................................................M1
directions correct.......................................................................... A1 [2]
(ii) q is zero ....................................................................................... B1

w is positive OR ∆U = w and U increases .................................... B1
∆U is rise in kinetic energy of atoms ............................................M1
and mean kinetic energy ∝ T ....................................................... A1 [4]
(allow one of the last two marks if states ‘U increases so T rises’)
CEDAR COLLEGE 125
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003

(d)(b) (i)(i) M2tan
= {(R )2 x R1 x ω 2} I G (n.b.
θ 1 + =R20.182 (any 3subject
sig. fig.)
for equation) 1C1
= (3.2 x 10 ) x 8.0 x 1010 x (4.99 x 10-8)2/(6.67 x 10-11)
11 2
C1
(ii) percentage 29
= 3.06 x 10error kg = (0.002/0.180) x 100 1A1
(ii) less massive (only award this mark if reasonable attempt at (i)) B1 [4]
(9.17 x 1029 kg for more = 1.1massive
(%) star) 1 [3]
6 Total [12]
4 (a) (allow
e.g. 0.002/0.182
amplitude is notand allow 1!
constant 4 sig.isfig.)
or wave damped B1
do not allow 'displacement constant'
2 (a) (i) grav. pot. energy
should = GM
be (-)cos, 1M2sin)
(not /R 1 B1 [2]
energy = {6.67 x 10-11 x 197 x 4 x (1.66 x 10-27)2}/9.6 x 10-15 1
-47
(b) T = 0.60 s = 1.51 x 10 J 1C1 [3]
ω = 2π/T = 10.5 rad s-1 (allow 10.4 → 10.6) A1 [2]
(ii) elec. pot. energy = Q1Q2/4π ε 0R 1
(c) energy
same = {79 x 2 x (1.6 x 10-19)2}/4π x 8.85 x 10-12 x 9.6 x 10-15
period 1 B1
-12
displacement = 3.79
alwaysx 10less J 1M1 [3]
amplitude reducing appropriately A1 [3]
the2nd
(Forfor and 3rd marks,
substitution, -1 each
ignoreerror
theorfirst
omission
quarter to period
max 2 in (i) and in (ii))
Total [7]
(b) electric potential energy >> gravitational potential energy 1 [1]
(c) either 6 MeV = 9.6 x 10-13 J or 3.79 x 10-12 J = 24 MeV 1

not enough energy to get close to the nucleus 1 [2]
7
3 (a) (i) © University
reasonable shapeofas
Cambridge
‘inverse’ International
of k.e. line Examinations 2004 1
(ii) straight line, parallel to x-axis at 15 mJ 1 [2]
(b) either (max) kinetic energy (= ½ mv2) = ½ m ω 2a02 1

15 x 10-3 = ½ x 0.15 x ω 2 x (5.0 x 10-2)2 1
ω = 8.9(4) rad s-1 1
or (k.e. = ½ mv2), v = 0.44(7) m s-1 1

ω = v/a = (0.447)/(5.0 x 10-2) 1
ω = 8.9(4) rad s-1 1 [3]
(c) (i) either loss of energy (from the system) or amplitude decreases
or additional force acting (on the mass) 1
either continuous/gradual loss or force always opposing motion 1 [2]
(ii) either (now has 80% of its) p.e./k.e. = 12 mJ or loss in k.e. = 3 mJ 1

new amplitude = 4.5 cm (allow ± 0.1 cm) 1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 126

2 (a) obeys the law pV = constant × T ………………………..……………….. M1
Page 2 at all values of p, V and T Mark Scheme Syllabus
………………………………………………. Paper
A1 [2]
A LEVEL - JUNE 2005 9702 4
(b) n = (2.9 × 105 × 3.1 × 10–2) / (8.31 × 290) …..………………..………... C1
8
= 3.73 mol ………………………………………………………………. A1 [2]
4 (a) acceleration proportional to displacement (from a fixed point) M1
2
or a = - ω x with a, ω and x explained
3 .4 290
(c) at new pressure, n n = 3.73 × ×
and directed towards a fixed point 2 .9 300 A1 [2]
or negative sign explained= 4.23 mol ….………………………………………. C1
change = 0.50 mol ……………………………………………………….… C1
(b) for s.h.m.,
number a = (-)ω=2x0.50 / 0.012 = 42 (must round up for mark) ……. B1
of strokes A1 [3]
identifies ω2 as Aρg/M and therefore s.h.m. (may be implied) B1
3 (a) correct
2πf= ωstatement, words or symbols …..…………………………...….. B1 B1 [1]
1 Apg
(b)(i) whence = p∆V
f= …………………………………………………………………..
√ A0 C1
[3]
= 1.03 2×π105 ×M(2.96 × 10–2 – 1.87 × 10–5)
= (–) 3050 J …………………..……………….…………..…………… A1 [2]
(c) (i) T = 0.60 s or f= 1.7 Hz C1
4 -2 2
(ii) q 0.60== (2π√M)/√(π
4.05 {1.2 × 10 } × 950 × 9.81)
× 10 J ×…………………………………………………………. C1 B1 [1]
M = 0.0384 kg A1 [3]
(iii) ∆U = 4.05 × 104 – 3050 = 37500 J …no e.c.f. from (a)………………… A1 [1]
(ii) penalise 2 sig.fig.
decreasing peak once only
height/amplitude B1 [1]
(c) number of molecules = NA ………………………………………………. C1
5 (a) energy = 37500
field strength = potential 1023) [- sign not required]
/ (6.02 ×gradient B1 [1]
–20
[allow E==6.2 × 10but Jnot(accept
∆V/∆x 1 sig.fig.) …………………………..….
E = V/d] A1 [2]
9
4 (a) (i) ωNo =field
(b) 2πffor………………………………………………………....…………..
x<r B1 C1
for =
x>2πr,×curve
1400in correct direction, not going to zero
–1
B1
= 8800 rad s …………………………………………………………..
discontinuity at x = r (vertical line required) B1 A1
[3] [2]
= (–)ω2x0 ……………………………..…………………………………
(ii) a0 C1
2 –3
= (8800)
6 (a) (i) flux/field × 0.080
in core 10changing
must ×be M1
–2
= 6200
so that ms …………………….…………………………………….
an e.m.f./current is induced in the secondary A1 A1
[2] [2]
(b) straight line through origin with negative gradient …….…………….... M1

(ii) power = VI M1
end points of line correctly labelled …………………………………….. A1 [2]
output power is constant so if VS increases, IS decreases A1 [2]
(c) (i) zero displacement ………………………………………………………… B1 [1]
(b) (i) same shape and phase as IP graph B1 [1]
(ii) v = ωx0 ……………………………………………………………………. C1
(ii) same frequency
= 8800 × 0.080 × 10–3 M1
correct phase
= 0.70 m sw.r.t.…………………………………………………………….
–1 Fig. 6.3 A1 [2]
A1 [2]
(iii) ½π rad or 90°
B1 [1]
7 (a) curve levelling out (at 1.4 µg) M1

correct shape judged by masses at nT½ A1 [2]
[for second mark, values must be marked on y-axis)
(b) (i) N0 = (1.4 × 10-6 × 6.02 × 1023)/56 C1

= 1.5 × 1016 A1 [2]
(ii) A = λN C1
λ = ln2/(2.6 × 3600) (= 7.4 × 10-5 s-1) C1
A = 1.11 × 1012 Bq A1 [3]
(c) 1/10 of original mass of Manganese remains C1

0.10 = exp(-ln2 × t/2.6)
t = 8.63 hours A1 [2]
[use of 1/9, giving answer 8.24 hrs scores 1 mark]
CEDAR COLLEGE
© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2005 127
the gradient varies with temperature A1 [2]
20402± 20 Ω corresponds to 15.0Mark

(b)Page ± 0.2Scheme
°C Syllabus C1 Paper
T / K = T / °C + 273.15GCE (allow 273.2)
A/AS LEVEL - OCT/NOV 2006 9702 C1 04
temperature is 288.2 K A1 [3]
10
4 1 (a)
(a) (i)either
1.0ratio of work done to mass/charge B1 [1]
or work done moving unit mass/charge from infinity
(ii)or both
40 Hzhave zero potential at infinity B1 B1
[1] [1]
(b) gravitational forces are (always attractive) B1

(b) (i)electric
speed = 2π
forces fa be attractive or repulsive
can C1 B1
-3
for gravitational, ×work
= 2π 40 ×got42out
× 10
as masses come together
-1
= 10.6 m s /mass moves from infinity A1 [2]
B1
for electric, work done on charges if same sign, work got out if opposite sign as charges
(ii)come together = 4π2 f2 a
acceleration C1 B1 [4]
2 -3
2 (a) (i)
= (80π) × 42 × 10
idea of heat lost (by oil)-2= heat gained (by thermometer) C1
= 2650
32 x 1.4 x (54 – t) =m12sx 0.18 x (t – 19) A1 [2]
C1
t = 52.4°C A1 [3]
(c) (i) S marked correctly (on ‘horizontal line through centre of wheel) B1
(ii) either ratio (= 1.6/54) = 0.030 or (=1.6/327) = 0.0049 A1 [1]
(ii) A marked correctly (on ‘vertical line’ through centre of wheel) B1 [2]
(b) thermistor thermometer (allow ‘resistance thermometer’) B1
because small mass/thermal capacity B1 [2]
(c) © temperature
boiling point University ofisCambridge
constant International Examinations 2006 M1
further comment
e.g. heating of bulb would affect only rate of boiling A1 [2]
11
3 (a) use of a = – ω 2x clear C1
either ω = √(2k/m) or ω 2 = (2k/m) B1
ω = 2 πf C1
f = (1/2 π)√(2 x 300)/0.240) B1
= 7.96 ≈ 8 Hz A0 [4]
(b) (i) resonance B1 [1]
(ii) 8 Hz B1 [1]
(c) (increase amount of) damping B1

without altering (k or) m …(some indirect reference is acceptable) B1
sensible suggestion B1 [3]
4 (a) (i) GMm {(R + h1)–1 – (R + h2)–1} B1

½m {v12 – v22} B1 [2]
(b) 2M x 6.67 x 10–11 {(26.28 x 106)–1 – (29.08 x 106)–1} = 53702 – 50902 B1

M x 4.888 x 10–19 = 2.929 x 106 C1
M = 6.00 x 1024 kg A1 [3]
(If equation in (a) is dimensionally unsound, then 0/3 marks in (b), if dimensionally sound but
incorrect, treat as e.c.f.)
5 (a) (i) (induced) e.m.f proportional/equal to rate of change of flux (linkage) B1

(allow ‘induced voltage, induced p.d.)
flux is cust as the disc moves M1
hence inducing an e.m.f A0 [2]
(ii) field in disc is not uniform/rate of cutting not same/speed of disc not same (over whole
disc) B1
so different e.m.f.’s in different parts of disc M1
lead to eddy currents A0 [2]
(b) eddy currents dissipate thermal energy in disc B1

energy derived from oscillation of disc B1
energy of disc depends on amplitude of oscillations B1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE © UCLES 2006 128

2. acceleration = 0 A1 [1]
Page
(c) e.g.3 ‘radius’ of planet varies Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
density ofGCE planet
A/AS notLEVEL
constant – October/November 2007 9702 04
12 planet spinning
3 (a) (i) nearby
0.8 cm planets
...................................................................................................................
/ stars B1 [1]
(any sensible comments, 1 mark each, maximum 2) B2 [2]
(ii) (max.) kinetic energy = 2.56 mJ ........................................................................... C1
v(MAX) = ωa ............................................................................................................ C1
2 2
2 (a) (Thermal)
(max.)energy
kinetic/ energy
heat required
= ½mωto aconvert
or ½mω unit2 (a 2
mass – xof2
) solid to liquid M1 C1
............................................
at its2.56
normal -3
melting 2 -2 2
× 10 = ½ ×point0.130 / without
× ω × any (0.8 change
× 10 ) in temperature A1 M1
.......................................................... [2]
(reference to 1 kg -1 to ice → water scores max 1 mark)
or
ω = 24.8 rad s ..................................................................................................... C1
f = ω/2π ................................................................................................................ M1
= 4.0 Hz (3.95 Hz) .............................................................................................. A0 [6]
(b) (i) To make allowance for heat gains from the atmosphere B1 [1]
(b) (ii)
(i) e.g.
line constant
parallel torate of production
x-axis at 2.56 mJof...........................................................................
droplets from funnel B1 [1]
constant mass of water collected per minute in beaker
(ii) (any
1 4.0sensible suggestion, 1 mark) B1 B1
Hz ................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) mass
2 0.50melted
cm (allowby heater
±0.03incm)
5 minutes = 64.7 – ½ × 16.6 = 56.4 g C1 B1
................................................................................ [2]
–3
56.4 × 10 × L = 18 C1
L = 320 kJ kg–1 A1 [3]
4 (a) (i) (Use
eitherof lines
m = 64.7, giving
directed awayL =from kJ kg–1, scores max 1 mark
278 sphere
use
or of mlines
= 48.1, giving
go from L = 374
positive to kJ kg–1, scores max 2 marks)
negative
or line shows direction of force on positive charge ....................................... M1
13 so positively charged ............................................................................................ A1 [2]
3 (a) acceleration / force (directly) proportional to displacement M1
and either
(ii) directed
either all towardsto)
lines (appear fixed pointfrom centre
radiate
oror acceleration
all lines are& displacement
normal to surface in opposite
of sphere directions A1 B1
................................................... [2]
[1]
(b) (i) maximum

(b) tangent / minimum
to curve height / 8 mm above cloth / 14 mm below cloth B1 B1
........................................................................................................... [1]
in correct position and direction ................................................................................... B1 [2]
(ii) 1. a = 11 mm A1 [1]
2. ω = 2πf C1
Page 3 -9 Mark Scheme-12 Syllabus Paper
2π × 4.5
(c) (i) V == (0.76 × 10 ) / (4π × 8.85 × 10 × 0.024) ..................................................... C1
== 285
28.3Vrad s–1 (do not allow 1 s.f.) A1 A1
........................................................................................................... [2]
[2]
(c) (i) v = ωa C1
(ii) negative charge is induced
–3 on (inside of) box ...................................................... M1
= 28.3 × 11 × 10
formula applies–1 to isolated (point) charge
= 0.31 m s (do not allow©1UCLES s.f.) 2008 A1 [2]
OR less work done moving test charge from infinity .......................................... A1
so potential is lower .............................................................................................. A1 [3]
(ii) v = ω √(a2 – y2)
y = 3 mm C1
–3 2 2
= 28.3 × 10 √(11 – 3 )
(d) either gravitational–1field is always attractive C1
or = 0.30
field m must
lines s (allow 1 s.f.) towards both box and sphere ..............................
be directed A1B1 [3]
[1]
4 (a) ∆U = q + w (allow correct word equation) B1 [1]
(b) either kinetic energy constant because temperature constant M1

potential energy constant because no intermolecular forces M1
so no change in internal energy A1 [3]
or kinetic energy and potential energy both constant (M1)
so no change in internal energy (A1)
reason for either constant k.e. or constant p.e. given (A1)
5 (a) change/loss in kinetic energy = change/gain in electric potential energy B1

CEDAR ½mv2 = q2 / 4πε0 r
2 ×COLLEGE C1 129
© UCLES 2007
2 × ½ × 2 × 1.67 × 10–27 × v2
= (1.6 × 10–19 )2 / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 1.1 × 10–14 ) M1
v = 2.5 × 106 m s–1 A0 [3]
Page
Page 33 Mark
Mark Scheme:
Scheme: Teachers’
Teachers’ version
version Syllabus
Syllabus Paper
Paper
GCE A/AS LEVEL – May/June 2009 2009 9702 04
14 GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November 9702 41
43 (a)
(a) (i)
e.g. (θ
two=)objects
ω t (allow any subject
of different if allat
masses terms
samegiven)
temperature (M1) B1 [1]
same material would have different amount of heat (A1)
(ii)
e.g. (SQ =) r sinωt
temperature (allow
shows any subject
direction of heatif all terms given)
transfer (M1) B1 [1]
from high to low regardless of objects (A1)
e.g. when substance melts/boils (M1)
(b) this is the input
heat solution
but of
nothe = –ω2 x
equation achange
temperature (A1) M1
2
aany= two,
–ω xM1 is the
+ A1(defining)
each, maxequation of s.h.m. A1
4 ………………………………..…………........................... [2]
[4]
(c)
(b) (i) = ω / 2πlosses (to the surroundings) .................................................................M1
(i) fenergy C1
= 4.7 / increase
either 2π as the temperature rises
or= 0.75 rise
Hz is zero when heat loss = heat input ............................................... A1 [2]
(ii) videa
(ii) of(rinput
= rω mustpower = maximum rate of heat loss ............................................. C1
be identified)
power
= 4.7 = m × c × ∆θ / ∆t
× 12
54= = cm s–1
560.96 × c × 3.7 / 60 ..................................................................................... C1
A1 [2]
c = 910 J kg-1 K-1 ............................................................................................... A1 [3]
5 (a) (i) ratio of charge (on body) and its potential [Total:
B1 [1]9]
(do not allow reference to plates of a capacitor)
15
4 (a) (ii)
(i) (potential
amplitudeat=surface
0.2 mmof sphere
..........................................................................................
=) V = Q / 4πε0 r A1 [1]
M1
C = Q / V = 4πε0 r A0 [1]
(ii) period = 1.2 ms ................................................................................................. C1
frequency = 830 Hz .......................................................................................... A1 [2]
(b) (i) C = 4 × π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 0.36
= 4.0 × 10–11 F (allow 1 s.f.) A1 [1]
(b) (i) any two of zero, 0.6 ms and 1.2 ms .................................................................... A1 [1]
(ii) Q = CV
(ii) any= two
4.0of 10–11
× 0.3 ms, 1051.5 ms ...................................................................... A1 [1]
0.9 ×ms,
× 7.0
–5
= 2.8 × 10 C A1 [1]
(c) either v = ωx0 = 2πfx0

= insulator
(c) plastic is an 2π × 830/ not
× 0.2 × 10-3 = 1.05
a conductor / hasm nos-1 free electrons B1
or
charges slope
do notofmove
graph(on= an m s-1 ……(allow ± 0.1 m s-1) ....................................... C1
1.0insulator) B1
2
EK = ½mv
either so no single value for the potential
or = ½charge 10-3 × 1.05
× 2.5 ×cannot 2
.....................................................................................
be considered to be at centre C1
B1 [3]
-3
= 1.4 × 10 J ...................................................................................................... A1 [3]
(d) either energy = ½CV2 or energy = ½QV and C = Q/V C1

–11 5 2
(d) energy
(i) large= / ½
maximum
× 4 × 10amplitude
× {(7.0 of vibration
× 10 × 105 )2 )}
) – (2.5.............................................................. B1
C1
when= impressed
8.6 J frequency equals natural frequency of vibration ...................... B1 A1 [2]
[3]
(ii) e.g. metal panels on machinery vibrate / oscillate ........................................... (M1)

motor in machine impresses frequency on panel ......................................(A1)
e.g. car suspension system vibrates / oscillates................................................. (M1)
going over bumps would give large amplitude vibrations .............................(A1)
any feasible example, M1 + A1 ............................................................................... [2]
 
[Total: 12]
CEDAR COLLEGE 130

©
© UCLES
UCLES 2009
2009
1 (a) work done moving unit mass M1
from infinity to the point
(iii) realisation that total internal energy is the total kinetic energy C1A1 [2]
–21 23
energy = 6.0 × 10 × 68 × 6.02 × 10 C1
= 2.46 × 105 J A1 [3]
(b) (i) at R, φ = 6.3 × 107 J kg–1 (allow ± 0.1 × 107) B1
16 φ = GM / R
6.3 × 107 /=backward
3 (a) (i) to-and-fro (6.67 × 10 –11
× M) / (6.4
and forward motion
6
× 10(between
) two limits) B1C1 [1]
24
M = 6.0 × 10 kg (allow 5.95 → 6.14) A1 [3]
(ii) no energy loss
Maximum or for
of 2/3 gain
any / no external
value chosen forceforacting
φ not at/ constant
R energy / constant amplitude
B1 [1]
7 –1 7
(ii) change in potential = 2.1 × 10 J kg (allow ± 0.1 × 10 ) C1
(iii) acceleration directed
loss in potential energy towards a fixed
= gain point energy
in kinetic B1B1
acceleration
½ mv 2 = φ proportional
m or ½ mv 2to=distance GM / 3Rfrom the fixed point / displacement B1C1 [2]
2 7
½ v = 2.1 × 10
v = 6.5 × 103 m s–1 ………..……(allow 6.3 → 6.6) A1 [4]
(b) acceleration is constant 3 (magnitude)
–1 M1
(answer 7.9
so cannot be s.h.m. × 10 m s , based on x = 2R, allow max 3 marks) A1 [2]
(iii) e.g. speed / velocity / acceleration would be greater B1
deviates / bends from straight path B1 [2]
(any sensible ideas, 1 each, max 2)
17 © UCLES 2010
2 (a) (i) reduction in energy (of the oscillations) (B1)
reduction in amplitude / energy of oscillations (B1)
due to force (always) opposing motion / resistive forces (B1) [2]
any two of the above, max 2
(ii) amplitude is decreasing (very) gradually / oscillations would

continue (for a long time) /many oscillations M1
light damping A1 [2]
(b) (i) frequency = 1 / 0.3

= 3.3 Hz A1 [1]
allow points taken from time axis giving f = 3.45 Hz
(ii) energy = ½ mv 2 and v = ωa C1

= ½ × 0.065 × (2π/0.3)2 × (1.5 × 10–2)2 M1
= 3.2 mJ A0 [2]
(c) amplitude reduces exponentially / does not decrease linearly M1

so will be not be 0.7 cm A1 [2]
© UCLES 2010
CEDAR COLLEGE 131

18
3 (a) (i) resonance B1 [1]
(ii) amplitude 16 mm and frequency 4.6 Hz A1 [1]
(b) (i) a = (–)ω2x and ω = 2πf C1

a = 4π2 × 4.62 × 16 × 10–3 C1
= 13.4 m s–2 A1 [3]
(ii) F = ma C1
= 150 × 10–3 × 13.4
= 2.0 N A1 [2]
(c) line always ‘below’ given line and never zero M1

peak is at 4.6 Hz (or slightly less) and flatter A1 [2]
4 (a) charge / potential (difference) (ratio must be clear) B1 [1]

GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2010 9702 43
19
(b) (i)
3 (a) (i) 8.0
V = cm
Q / 4πε0r B1
A1 [1]
[1]
(ii) 2πf
(ii) C=Q / V = 4πε0r and 4πε0 is constant
= 220 M1
C1
so
f = 35 r
C ∝ (condone unit) A0
A1 [1]
[2]
(iii) line drawn mid-way between AB and CD (allow ±2 mm) B1 [1]

(c) (i) r = C / 4πε0r C1
–12
(iv) vr ==(6.8
ωa × 10 ) / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12) C1
C1
–2
= 6.1 × 10
= 220 × 4.0 m A1 [3]
= 880 cm s–1 A1 [2]
(ii) Q = CV = 6.8 × 10–12 × 220
= 1.5 × 10–9 C A1 [1]
(b) (i) 1. line drawn 3 cm above AB (allow ±2 mm) B1 [1]
2. arrow pointing upwards B1 [1]
(d) (i) V = Q/C = (1.5 × 10–9) / (18 × 10–12)
= 83line
(ii) 1. V drawn 3 cm above AB (allow ±2 mm) B1
A1 [1]
2. arrow pointing downwards B1 [1]
(ii) either energy = ½CV 2 C1
2 –12 2 –12 2
(iii) v = ω√(a∆E –=x2½ ) × 6.8 × 10 × 220 – ½ × 18 × 10 × 83 C1
2 –7 2 –8
= 220 =× 1.65
√(4.0× 10 – 2.0–)6.2 × 10 C1
–7
= 760 =cm s–1 × 10 J
1.03 A1 [2]
[3]
(incorrect
or energy
value for = ½QV
x, 0/2 marks) (C1)
∆E = ½ × 1.5 × 10–9 × 220 – ½ × 1.5 × 10–9 × 83 (C1)
= 1.03 × 10–7 J (A1)
4 (a) (i) work done moving unit positive charge M1
from infinity to the point A1 [2]
(ii) charge / potential (difference) (ratio must be clear) B1 [1]
(b) (i) capacitance = (2.7 × 10–6 ) / (150 × 103 ) C1

(allow any appropriate values)
capacitance = 1.8 × 10–11 (allow 1.8 ±0.05) A1 [2]
(ii) either energy = ½CV 2 or energy = ½QV and Q = CV C1

CEDAR COLLEGE 132
energy = ½ × 1.8 × 10–11 × (150 × 103 )2 2010
© UCLES or ½ × 2.7 × 10–6 × 150 × 103
= 0.20 J A1 [2]
substitutes temperature as 298 K C1
either 1.1 × 105 × 6.5 × 10–2 = N × 1.38 × 10–23 × 298
or 1.1 × 105 × 6.5 × 10–2 = n × 8.31 × 298 and n = N / 6.02 × 1023 C1
N = 1.7 × 1024 A1 [4]
20
3 (a) acceleration / force proportional to displacement from a fixed point M1
acceleration / force (always) directed towards that fixed point / in opposite
direction to displacement A1 [2]
(b) (i) Aρg / m is a constant and so acceleration proportional to x B1

negative sign shows acceleration towards a fixed point / in opposite
direction to displacement B1 [2]
(ii) ω 2 = (Aρg / m) C1
ω = 2πf C1
(2 × π × 1.5)2 = ({4.5 × 10–4 × 1.0 × 103 × 9.81} / m) C1
m = 50 g A1 [4]
4 21
(a) work done in bringing unit positive charge M1
from infinity (to that point) A1 [2]
3 (a) (i) amplitude remains constant B1 [1]
(ii) amplitude decreases gradually M1

(b) (i) field strength is potential gradient B1 [1]
Page 3 light damping Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus A1
Paper [2]
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012
(ii) field strength proportional to force (on particle Q) 9702 B1 41
(iii) period = 0.80 s C1
potential gradient proportional to gradient of (potential energy) graph B1
3 frequencyequal
(a) (numerically = 1.25 Hz (period
to) quantity not 0.8 s,energy
of (thermal) then 0/2)
required to change A1 [2]
so force is proportional to the gradient of the graph A0 [2]
the state of unit mass of a substance M1
without any change of temperature A1 [2]
(b) (i) (induced)
(Allow 1 mark e.m.f. is proportional
for definition to latent heat of fusion/vaporisation)
of specific M1
rate of change/cutting of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
(b) (ii) a current

either energyis induced
suppliedin=the coil × 2 × 60 = 288000 J
2400 C1 M1
as magnet moves in coil
energy required for evaporation = 106 × 2260 = 240000 J C1 A1
current in resistor
= gives
© University
difference 48000ofrise to a heating
JCambridge effect Examinations 2011
International M1
thermal
rate of loss = 48000 / 120 = 400 Woscillation of the magnet
energy is derived from energy of A1 A1 [4]
or energy required for evaporation = 106 × 2260 = 240000 J (C1)
power required for evaporation = 240000 / (2 × 60) = 2000 W (C1)
4 (a) (i) zero rate
field of
(strength) inside
loss = 2400 spheres
– 2000 = 400 W (A1) B1 [1]
[3]
22 (ii) either field strength is zero
4 (a) a (–)ω2x the
=or andfields
ω = are
2π/Tin opposite directions C1 M1
T = 0.60 s at a point between the spheres C1 A1 [2]
a = (4π2 × 2.0 × 10–2 ) / (0.6)2
= 2.2 m s–2 A1 [3]
(b) (i) field strength is (–) potential gradient (not V/x) B1 [1]
(b) (ii) 1. field

sinusoidal strength
wave has
with all maximum
values value
positive B1 B1
atpositive,
all values x = 11.4allcm
peaks at EK and energy = 0 at t = 0 B1 B1 [2]
period = 0.30 s B1 [3]
2. field strength is zero B1
either at x = 7.9 cm (allow ±0.3 cm)
5 or at 0 to charge
(a) force per unit positive 1.4 cm acting
or 11.4
on a cm to 12 cm
stationary charge B1 B1 [2]
[1]
5 (a)
(b) (i)
(i) Bqv(sinθ) or Bqv(cosθ)
E = Q / 4πε 0r
2
C1 B1 [1]
Q = 1.8 × 10 × 102 × 4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × (25 × 10–2 )2
4
M1
(ii) qE
Q = 1.25 × 10–5 C = 12.5 µC A0 B1 [1]
[2]
CEDAR
(ii) COLLEGE
V = Q / 4πε0 r 133
(b) FB must be opposite–5in direction to FE –12 B1
= (1.25 × 10 ) / (4π × 8.85 × 10 × 25 × 10–2 ) C1
so magnetic field into plane of paper B1 [2]
= 4.5 × 105 V A1 [2]
(Do not allow use of V = Er unless explained)
or ∆EP = GMm/r1 – GMm/r2 C1
Correct substitution B1
8.0 × 1018 J A1
(∆EP = GMm/r1 + GMm/r2 is incorrect physics so 0/3)
23
2 (a) energy = ½mω2a2 and ω = 2πf C1
= ½ × 37 × 10–3 × (2π × 3.5)2 × (2.8 × 10–2)2 M1
= 7.0 × 10–3 J A0 [2]
(allow 2π × 3.5 shown as 7π)
Energy = ½ mv2 and v = rω (C1)

Correct substitution (M1)
Energy = 7.0 × 10–3 J (A0)
(b) EK = EP
½mω2 (a2 – x2) = ½mω2x2 or EK or EP = 3.5 mJ C1
x = a/√2 = 2.8 /√2 or EK = ½mω2 (a2 – x2) or EP = ½mω2x2 C1
= 2.0 cm A1 [3]
(EK or EP = 7.0 mJ scores 0/3)
Allow: k = 17.9 (C1)

Page 3 E = ½ kx2Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus (C1) Paper
x = 2.0 cm
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9702 (A1) 42
(c) (i) graph: horizontal line, y-intercept = 7.0 mJ with end-points of line at
+2.8 cm and –2.8 cm B1 [1]
(ii) graph: reasonable curve B1

with maximum at (0,7.0) end-points of line at (–2.8, 0)
and (+2.8, 0) B1 [2]
(iii) graph: © University

inverted of Cambridge
version of (ii) International Examinations 2012 M1
with intersections at (–2.0, 3.5) and (+2.0, 3.5) A1 [2]
(Allow marks in (iii), but not in (ii), if graphs K & P are not labelled)
(d) gravitational potential energy B1 [1]

3 (a) sum of potential energy and kinetic energy of atoms/molecules/particles 9702 M1 42
24
reference to random (distribution) A1 [2]
3 (a) (i) ω = 2π / T
= 2π / 0.69 C1
(b) (i) as = 9.1 rad
lattice s–1
structure is ‘broken’/bonds broken/forces between A1 [2]
(allow use reduced
molecules of f = 1.5(not
Hz to 9.4 rad s–1)
give ω = separate)
molecules B1
no change in kinetic energy, potential energy increases M1
1. x = energy
(ii) internal 2.1 cosincreases
9.1t A1 [3]
2.1 and 9.1 numerical values B1
(ii) eitheruse molecules/atoms/particles
of cos move faster/ <c2> is increasing B1 [2]
or kinetic energy increases with temperature (increases) B1
no v0 = 2.1
2. change 10–2 × 9.1
in ×potential (allowkinetic
energy, ecf of energy
value ofincreases
x0 from (ii)1.) M1
–1
v0 =energy
internal 0.19 mincreases
s A1 B1 [3]
v = v0 sin 9.1t (allow cos 9.1t if sin used in (ii)1.) B1 [2]
4 (a) (i) as r decreases, energy decreases/work got out (due to) M1

attraction
(b) energy = either mv02mass
so½point or ½ is
mω 2 2
negatively
x0 charged A1 [2]
= either ½ × 0.078 × 0.19 or ½ × 0.078 × 9.12 × (2.1 × 10–2)2
2
C1
(ii) electric × 10–3 J energy = charge × electric potential
= 1.4potential B1 A1 [2]
electric field strength is potential gradient B1
field strength = gradient of potential energy graph/charge A0 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
4 (a) (i) V = q / 4πε0R B1 134
[1]
(b) tangent drawn at (4.0,

(ii) (capacitance 14.5)
is) ratio of charge and potential or q /V B1 M1
–24
gradient
C == 3.6= ×4πε
q /V 100R A2 A0 [1]
25
4 (a) acceleration / force proportional to displacement (from a fixed point) M1
either acceleration and displacement in opposite directions
or acceleration always directed towards a fixed point A1 [2]
(b) (i) g and r are constant so a is proportional to x B1

negative sign shows a and x are in opposite directions B1 [2]
(ii) ω 2 = g / r and ω = 2π / T C1
ω 2 = 9.8 / 0.28
= 35 C1
Page 3 T = 2π / √35 = 1.06 s Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge
time interval τ =International
0.53 s AS / A Level – May / June 2015 9702 41 [3]
A1
(ii) 1. P + h = mL or substitution of one set of values C1
(c) sketch:(110
time–period
70) = constant
–1
(0.38 – 0.26)L
(or increases very slightly) C1
M1
L = 330 J g
drawn line always ‘inside’ given loops A1
A1 [3]
successive decrease in peak height A1 [3]
2. either 70 + h = 0.26 × 330
or 110 + h = 0.38 × 330 C1
h
5 (a) work done = 17 / 16 / 15 W
in moving unit positive charge A1
M1 [2]
26 from infinity (to the point) A1 [2]
4 (a) (i) frequency at which object is made to vibrate/oscillate B1 [1]
(b) (i) inside the sphere, the potential would be constant B1 [1]
(ii) frequency at which object vibrates when free to do so B1 [1]
(ii) for point charge, Vx is constant B1
(iii) maximum amplitude
co-ordinates of determines
clear and vibration of oscillating
two valuesbody
of Vx at least 4 cm apart B1
M1
when forced frequency
conclusion made clear equals natural frequency (of vibration) B1
A1 [2]
[3]
(b)
(c) e.g.
q =vibration
4πε0Vx of quartz/piezoelectric crystal (what is vibrating) M1
either for accurate timing
q = 4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 180 × 1.0 × 10–2 M1
or maximise amplitude of ultrasound waves (why it is useful) A1 [2]
= 2.0 × 10–10 C A1 [2]
(c) e.g. vibrating metal panels (what is vibrating) M1

6 BILsinθ
(a) F =either place strengthening struts across the panel C1
=or
2.6 × 10–3 shape/area
change × 5.4 × 4.7 ×of10 –2
panel × sin
(how34°it is reduced) A1 [2]
–4
= 3.69 × 10 N A1 [2]
(allow 1 mark for use of cos 34°)
5 (a) (magnitude of electric field strength is the potential gradient B1
use of gradient at x = 4.0 cm M1
(b) peakgradient
current == 4.5
1.7 ×× 10
√24 N C–1 (allow ± 0.3 × 10 4 ) C1
A1
= 2.4 A
or
max. force = 2.6 × 10–3 × 2.4 × 4.7 × 10–2 × sin 34°
–4
Q= 1.64 × 10 NQ V C1
V = and E = 2
leading to E = (B1)
4πε0 x 4πε x x
variation = 2 × 1.64 × 10–4 0
= 3.3 × 10–4 N A1 [3]
E = 1.8 × 103 / 0.04 (M1)
= 4.5 × 104 N C–1 (A1) [3]
(b) (i) 3.6 × 103 V A1 [1]

CEDAR
(ii) COLLEGE
capacitance = Q /©VCambridge International Examinations 2014 C1 135
–9 3
= (8.0 × 10 ) / (3.6 × 10 )
= 2.2 × 10–12 F A1 [2]
27
3 (a) acceleration/force proportional to displacement (from fixed point) M1
acceleration/force and displacement in opposite directions A1 [2]
(ii) loss is 5 / 100 × 150 mol = 7.5 mol
(b) maximum displacements/accelerations are different B1
or
graph 4.52 × 1024a straight line
∆Nis =curved/not C1
B1 [2]
t = (7.5 × 6.02 × 1023 ) / 1.5 × 1019
or = 2π / T and T = 0.8 s
(c) (i) ω C1
t = 4.52 × 1024 / 1.5 × 1019 C1
ω = 7.9 rad5s–1 A1 [2]
= 3.0 × 10 s A1 [3]
(ii) a = (–)ω2 x
= 7.852 × 1.5 × 10–2 C1
3 (a) no net energy transfer between the bodies
or
= 0.93 m s–2 or 0.94 m s–2 A1 [2]
bodies are at the same temperature B1 [1]
(iii) ∆E = ½ mω2 (x02 – x2) C1
(b) (i) thermocouple, platinum/metal resistance thermometer, pyrometer B1 [1]
= ½ × 120 × 10–3 × 7.852 × {(1.5 × 10–2)2 – (0.9 × 10–2)2} C1
(ii) thermistor, thermocouple B1 [1]
= 5.3 × 10–4 J A1 [3]
(c) (i) change = 11.5 K B1 [1]

4 (a) (i) product of speed and density M1
(ii) final temperature = 311.2 K B1 [1]
reference to speed in medium (and density of medium) A1 [2]
28
4 (a) (ii) T =ratio
(i) α: 0.60ofs reflected intensity
and ω = 2π /T and/to incident intensity B1
C1
ω1 =and
Z 10 Z 2: (specific) –1
(10.47) rad s acoustic impedances of media (on each side of boundary) B1
A1 [2]
[2]
(ii) energy = ½mω2x0 2 or ½mv2 and v = ωx0 C1

(b) in muscle: IM = I0 e–µx
==½I0×exp(–23
120 × 10×–33.4 × 10–22 )× (2.0 × 10–2)2
× (10.5) C1
IM / I0 = 0.457= 2.6 × 10–3 J C1

A1 [2]
at boundary: α = (6.3 – 1.7)2 / (6.3 + 1.7)2
= 0.33in correct directions
(b) sketch: smooth curve C1
B1
T /IM at
Ipeak = [(1
f – α) =] 0.67 C1
M1
T / I0 = 0.457
Iamplitude × 0.67
never zero and line extends from 0.7fto 1.3f A1 [3]
= 0.31 A1 [5]
(c) sketch: peaked line always below a peaked line A M1
peak not as sharp and at (or slightly less than) frequency of peak in line A A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 136

29
3 (a) acceleration/force proportional to displacement (from fixed point) M1
acceleration/force and displacement in opposite directions A1 [2]
(b) maximum displacements/accelerations are different B1
graph is curved/not a straight line B1 [2]
(c) (i) ω = 2π / T and T = 0.8 s C1
ω = 7.9 rad s–1 A1 [2]
(ii) a = (–)ω2 x
= 7.852 × 1.5 × 10–2 C1
= 0.93 m s–2 or 0.94 m s–2 A1 [2]
(iii) ∆E = ½ mω2 (x02 – x2) C1
= ½ × 120 × 10–3 × 7.852 × {(1.5 × 10–2)2 – (0.9 × 10–2)2} C1
= 5.3 × 10–4 J A1 [3]

 
4 (a) (i) product of speed and density M1
reference to speed in medium (and density of medium) A1 [2]
(ii) α: ratio of reflected intensity and/to incident intensity B1
Z1 and Z2: (specific) acoustic impedances of media (on each side of boundary) B1 [2]
(b) in muscle: IM = I0 e–µx

= I0 exp(–23 × 3.4 × 10–2) C1
IM / I0 = 0.457 C1
at boundary: α = (6.3 – 1.7)2 / (6.3 + 1.7)2

= 0.33 C1
IT /IM = [(1 – α) =] 0.67 C1
IT / I0 = 0.457 × 0.67
= 0.31 A1 [5]
CEDAR COLLEGE 137

A2
ELECTRIC FIELDS 
CEDAR COLLEGE 138

CEDAR COLLEGE 139

CEDAR COLLEGE 140
CEDAR COLLEGE 141

CEDAR COLLEGE 142
3 May/June 2005 , Question #5, qp_4 10 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 An isolated conducting sphere of radius r is given a charge +Q. This charge may be
assumed to act as a point charge situated at the centre of the sphere, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
+Q
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2. shows the variation with distance x from the centre of the sphere of the potential V
due to the charge +Q.
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r
x
Fig. 5.2
(a) State the relation between electric field and potential.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 143

© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Using the relation in (a), on Fig. 5.3 sketch a graph to show the variation with distance x
of the electric field E due to the charge +Q.
0
0 r 2r 3r 4r x
[3]
Fig. 5.3
CEDAR COLLEGE
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/M/J/05 144
[Turn over
Examiner’s
Use
3 Two charged points A and B are separated by a distance of 6.0 cm, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
6.0 cm
A B
Fig. 3.1
The variation with distance d from A of the electric field strength E along the line AB is shown
in Fig. 3.2.
20
E / kV m–1
15
10
0 6
0 2 4
d /cm
position position
of A of B
Fig. 3.2
An electron is emitted with negligible speed from A and travels along AB.
(a) State the relation between electric field strength E and potential V.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/M/J/07 145
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The area below the line of the graph of Fig. 3.2 represents the potential difference
between A and B.
Use Fig. 3.2 to determine the potential difference between A and B.
potential difference = …………………………. V [4]
(c) Use your answer to (b) to calculate the speed of the electron as it reaches point B.
speed = …………………………. m s–1 [2]
(d) (i) Use Fig. 3.2 to determine the value of d at which the electron has maximum
acceleration.
d = …………………… cm [1]
(ii) Without any further calculation, describe the variation with distance d of the
acceleration of the electron.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 146

5 Oct/Nov 2007 , Question #4 , qp_4 10 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A small charged metal sphere is situated in an earthed metal box. Fig. 4.1 illustrates the
electric field between the sphere and the metal box.
Fig. 4.1
(a) By reference to Fig. 4.1, state and explain
(i) whether the sphere is positively or negatively charged,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) why it appears as if the charge on the sphere is concentrated at the centre of the
sphere.
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on a stationary electron
situated at point A. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07 147
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) The radius r of the sphere is 2.4 cm. The magnitude of the charge q on the sphere is
0.76 nC.
(i) Use the expression

Q
V=
4 0r
to calculate a value for the magnitude of the potential V at the surface of the
sphere.
V = ...............................................V [2]
(ii) State the sign of the charge induced on the inside of the metal box. Hence explain
whether the actual magnitude of the potential will be greater or smaller than the
value calculated in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..............................................................................................................................[3]
(d) A lead sphere is placed in a lead box in free space, in a similar arrangement to that
shown in Fig. 4.1. Explain why it is not possible for the gravitational field to have a similar
shape to that of the electric field.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES
CEDAR 2007
COLLEGE 9702/04/O/N/07 [Turn
148over
6 May/June 2008 , Question #4 , qp_4 11
(i) State the value of x at which the potential is zero. For

Examiner’s
x = ........................................... cm [1] Use
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to determine the charge at B.
charge = ........................................... C [3]
(c) A small test charge is now moved along the line AB in (b) from x = 5.0 cm to x = 27 cm.
State and explain the value of x at which the force on the test charge will be maximum.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 149

10
5 (a) Define electric potential at a point. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An α-particle is emitted from a radioactive source with kinetic energy of 4.8 MeV.
The α-particle travels in a vacuum directly towards a gold ( 197

79Au) nucleus, as illustrated
in Fig. 5.1.
path of gold
α - particle nucleus
Fig. 5.1
The α-particle and the gold nucleus may be considered to be point charges in an isolated
system.
(i) Explain why, as the α-particle approaches the gold nucleus, it comes to rest.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) For the closest approach of the α-particle to the gold nucleus determine
1. their separation,
separation = ........................................... m [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 150

© UCLES 2009 9702/41/O/N/09
11
2. the magnitude of the force on the α-particle. For

Examiner’s
Use
force = .......................................... N [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 151

4 (a) Explain what is meant by the potential energy of a body. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
2
(b) Two deuterium ( 1 H) nuclei each have initial kinetic energy EK and are initially separated
by a large distance.
The nuclei may be considered to be spheres of diameter 3.8 × 10–15 m with their masses
and charges concentrated at their centres.
The nuclei move from their initial positions to their final position of just touching, as
2 2
initially 1H 1H
kinetic energy EK kinetic energy EK
3.8 × 10–15 m
2 2
finally 1H 1H
at rest
Fig. 4.1
(i) For the two nuclei approaching each other, calculate the total change in
1. gravitational potential energy,
energy = ............................................ J [3]
2. electric potential energy.
energy = ............................................ J [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10
CEDAR COLLEGE 152

9
(ii) Use your answers in (i) to show that the initial kinetic energy EK of each nucleus For
is 0.19 MeV. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(iii) The two nuclei may rebound from each other. Suggest one other effect that could
happen to the two nuclei if the initial kinetic energy of each nucleus is greater than
that calculated in (ii).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 153

7 Negatively-charged particles are moving through a vacuum in a parallel beam. The particles For
have speed v. Examiner’s
The particles enter a region of uniform magnetic field of flux density 930 μT. Initially, the Use
particles are travelling at right-angles to the magnetic field. The path of a single particle is
shown in Fig. 7.1.
negatively-charged
arc of radius 7.9 cm
particles, speed v
uniform magnetic field,
flux density 930 μT
Fig. 7.1
The negatively-charged particles follow a curved path of radius 7.9 cm in the magnetic field.
A uniform electric field is then applied in the same region as the magnetic field. For an electric
field strength of 12 kV m–1, the particles are undeviated as they pass through the region of
the fields.
(a) On Fig. 7.1, mark with an arrow the direction of the electric field. [1]
(b) Calculate, for the negatively-charged particles,
(i) the speed v,
v = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

charge
(ii) the ratio .
mass
ratio = .................................... C kg–1 [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE 154

particle P particle Q
x
Fig. 4.1
The variation with separation x of the electric potential energy EP of particle Q is shown
in Fig. 4.2.
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
x / 10–10 m
–1
–2
E P / eV
–3
–4
Fig. 4.2
(i) State how the magnitude of the electric field strength is related to potential
gradient.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2011 9702/41/M/J/11
CEDAR COLLEGE 155

9
(ii) Use your answer in (i) to show that the force on particle Q is proportional to the For
gradient of the curve of Fig. 4.2. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The magnitude of the charge on each of the particles P and Q is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Calculate the separation of the particles at the point where particle Q has electric
potential energy equal to –5.1 eV.
separation = ............................................ m [4]
(d) By reference to Fig. 4.2, state and explain
(i) whether the two charges have the same, or opposite, sign,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) the effect, if any, on the shape of the graph of doubling the charge on particle P.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 156

11 Oct/Nov 2011 , Question #4 , qp_41 10
4 Two small charged metal spheres A and B are situated in a vacuum. The distance between For
the centres of the spheres is 12.0 cm, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
12.0 cm
sphere A P sphere B
The charge on each sphere may be assumed to be a point charge at the centre of the
sphere.
Point P is a movable point that lies on the line joining the centres of the spheres and is
distance x from the centre of sphere A.
The variation with distance x of the electric field strength E at point P is shown in Fig. 4.2.
150
E / 106 N C–1
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
x / cm
–50
–100
–150
–200
Fig. 4.2
CEDAR COLLEGE 157

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11
11
(a) State the evidence provided by Fig. 4.2 for the statements that For
Examiner’s
(i) the spheres are conductors, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the charges on the spheres are either both positive or both negative.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) State the relation between electric field strength E and potential gradient at a point.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 4.2 to state and explain the distance x at which the rate of change of
potential with distance is
1. maximum,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. minimum.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]

CEDAR COLLEGE 158
5 Positively charged particles are travelling in a vacuum through three narrow slits S1, S2 and For
S3, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
S1 S2 S3
beam of
charged
particles
direction of
electric field
Fig. 5.1
Each particle has speed v and charge q.

There is a uniform magnetic field of flux density B and a uniform electric field of field strength
E in the region between the slits S2 and S3.
(a) State the expression for the force F acting on a charged particle due to
(i) the magnetic field,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) the electric field.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The electric field acts downwards in the plane of the paper, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
State and explain the direction of the magnetic field so that the positively charged
particles may pass undeviated through the region between slits S2 and S3.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 159

© UCLES 2011 9702/41/O/N/11
5 (a) Define electric field strength. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An isolated metal sphere is to be used to store charge at high potential. The charge
stored may be assumed to be a point charge at the centre of the sphere. The sphere has
a radius of 25 cm. Electrical breakdown (a spark) occurs in the air surrounding the sphere
when the electric field strength at the surface of the sphere exceeds 1.8 × 104 V cm–1.
(i) Show that the maximum charge that can be stored on the sphere is 12.5 μC.
[2]
(ii) Calculate the potential of the sphere for this maximum charge.
potential = ............................................. V [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 160

4 A charged point mass is situated in a vacuum. A proton travels directly towards the mass, as For
illustrated in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
charged
proton
point mass
Fig. 4.1
When the separation of the mass and the proton is r, the electric potential energy of the
system is UP .
The variation with r of the potential energy UP is shown in Fig. 4.2.
r / cm
0 2 4 6 8 10
0
–10
UP / 10–26 J
–20
–30
–40
–50
Fig. 4.2
CEDAR COLLEGE 161

© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12
11
(a) (i) Use Fig. 4.2 to state and explain whether the mass is charged positively or For
negatively. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The gradient at a point on the graph of Fig. 4.2 is G.

Show that the electric field strength E at this point due to the charged point mass is
given by the expression
Eq = G
where q is the charge at this point.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Use the expression in (a)(ii) and Fig. 4.2 to determine the electric field strength at a
distance of 4.0 cm from the charged point mass.
field strength = ........................................ V m–1 [4]

CEDAR COLLEGE 162
6 (a) Describe the main principles of the determination of the charge on an oil drop by For
Millikan’s experiment. You may draw a diagram if you wish. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [7]
(b) In an experiment to determine the fundamental charge, values of charge on oil drops
were found by a student to be as shown below.
3.2 × 10–19 C; 6.4 × 10–19 C; 16 × 10–19 C; 9.7 × 10–19 C;
12.8 × 10–19 C; 3.1 × 10–19 C; 6.3 × 10–19 C.
State the value, to two significant figures, of the fundamental charge that is suggested
by these values of charge on oil drops.
fundamental charge = .............................................. C [1]

© UCLES 2012 9702/42/M/J/12
CEDAR COLLEGE 163
3 (a) State what is meant by a line of force in For

Examiner’s
(i) a gravitational field, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) an electric field.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A charged metal sphere is isolated in space.

State one similarity and one difference between the gravitational force field and the
electric force field around the sphere.
similarity: ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
difference: ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Two horizontal metal plates are separated by a distance of 1.8 cm in a vacuum.
A potential difference of 270 V is maintained between the plates, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
0V
proton
1.8 cm
+270 V
Fig. 3.1
A proton is in the space between the plates.
Explain quantitatively why, when predicting the motion of the proton between the plates,
the gravitational field is not taken into consideration.
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12
CEDAR COLLEGE 164

4 An α-particle and a proton are at rest a distance 20 μm apart in a vacuum, as illustrated in For
Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
20 m
-particle proton
P
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) State Coulomb’s law.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The α-particle and the proton may be considered to be point charges.
Calculate the electric force between the α-particle and the proton.
force = ............................................. N [2]
(b) (i) Define electric field strength.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 165

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/O/N/13
9
(ii) A point P is distance x from the α-particle along the line joining the α-particle to the For
proton (see Fig. 4.1). The variation with distance x of the electric field strength Eα Examiner’s
due to the α-particle alone is shown in Fig. 4.2. Use
300
200
electric
field strength
/ V m–1
100
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
x/ m
EP
–100
–200
–300
Fig. 4.2
The variation with distance x of the electric field strength EP due to the proton alone
is also shown in Fig. 4.2.
1. Explain why the two separate electric fields have opposite signs.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
2. On Fig. 4.2, sketch the variation with x of the combined electric field due to the
α-particle and the proton for values of x from 4 μm to 16 μm. [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 166

3 (a) Define electric potential at a point. 8 For

Examiner’s
Use
3 ..........................................................................................................................................
(a) Define electric potential at a point. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two point charges A and B are separated by a distance of 20 nm in a vacuum, as
illustrated in Fig.
(b) Two point 3.1. A and B are separated by a distance of 20 nm in a vacuum, as
charges
20 nm
20 nm
AA P
P BB
xx
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.1
A point P is a distance x from A along the line AB.
A point
TheP variation
is a distance x fromxAofalong
with distance the line
the electric AB. VA due to charge A alone is shown
potential
The variation with distance x of the electric potential VA due to charge A alone is shown
in Fig. 3.2.
in Fig. 3.2.
0.8
potential
0.8
V/V
potential VA VB
V/V 0.6
VA VB
0.6
0.4
0.4
0.2
0.2
0
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18
x / nm
Fig. 3.2
0
2 4
The variation 6
with distance 8 electric potential
x of the 10 12to charge B14
VB due alone is also16 18
shown in Fig. 3.2.
x / nm
Fig. 3.2
The variation with distance x of the electric potential VB due to charge B alone is also
shown in Fig. 3.2.
© UCLES 2013 9702/43/O/N/13
CEDAR COLLEGE 167

© UCLES 2013 9702/43/O/N/13
9
(i) State and explain whether the charges A and B are of the same, or opposite, sign. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) By reference to Fig. 3.2, state how the combined electric potential due to both
charges may be determined.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Without any calculation, use Fig. 3.2 to estimate the distance x at which the
combined electric potential of the two charges is a minimum.
x = .......................................... nm [1]
(iv) The point P is a distance x = 10 nm from A.

An α-particle has kinetic energy EK when at infinity.
Use Fig. 3.2 to determine the minimum value of EK such that the α-particle may
travel from infinity to point P.
EK = ............................................. J [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 168

14
6 A particle has mass m and charge +q and is travelling with speed v through a vacuum. For
The initial direction of travel is parallel to the plane of two charged horizontal metal plates, as Examiner’s
shown in Fig. 6.1. Use
+V
metal plate
path of particle
metal plate
Fig. 6.1
The uniform electric field between the plates has magnitude 2.8 × 104 V m–1 and is zero
outside the plates.
The particle passes between the plates and emerges beyond them, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
(a) Explain why the path of the particle in the electric field is not an arc of a circle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A uniform magnetic field is now formed in the region between the metal plates. The
magnetic field strength is adjusted so that the positively charged particle passes
undeviated between the plates, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
+V
region of uniform
electric and magnetic
fields
path of particle path of particle
Fig. 6.2
CEDAR COLLEGE 169

© UCLES 2013 9702/43/O/N/13
15
(i) State and explain the direction of the magnetic field. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) The particle has speed 4.7 × 105 m s–1.

Calculate the magnitude of the magnetic flux density.
magnetic flux density = ............................................. T [3]
(c) The particle in (b) has mass m, charge +q and speed v.

Without any further calculation, state the effect, if any, on the path of a particle that has
(i) mass m, charge –q and speed v,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) mass m, charge +q and speed 2v,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) mass 2m, charge +q and speed v.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]

CEDAR COLLEGE 170
16
8 (a) State what is meant by quantisation of charge.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to determine the elementary charge.

A charged oil drop is positioned between two horizontal metal plates, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
+ 680 V
oil drop
7.0 mm
Fig. 8.1
The plates are separated by a distance of 7.0 mm. The lower plate is earthed.
The potential of the upper plate is gradually increased until the drop is held stationary. The
potential for the drop to be stationary is 680 V.
The weight of the oil drop, allowing for the upthrust of the air, is 4.8 × 10−14 N.
Calculate the value for the charge on the oil drop.
charge = ..................................................... C [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/41/M/J/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 171

17
(c) The student repeats the experiment and determines the following values for the charge on oil
drops.
3.3 × 10−19 C 4.9 × 10−19 C 9.7 × 10−19 C 3.4 × 10−19 C
Use these values to suggest a value for the elementary charge. Explain your working.
elementary charge = ..................................................... C [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 172

9
4 A helium nucleus contains two protons.
In a model of the helium nucleus, each proton is considered to be a charged point mass.
The separation of these point masses is assumed to be 2.0 × 10−15 m.
(a) For the two protons in this model, calculate
(i) the electrostatic force,
electrostatic force = ..................................................... N [2]
(ii) the gravitational force.
gravitational force = ..................................................... N [2]
(b) Using your answers in (a), suggest why
(i) there must be some other force between the protons in the nucleus,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) this additional force must have a short range.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 173

6 (a) Explain the use of a uniform electric field and a uniform magnetic field for the selection of the
velocity of a charged particle. You may draw a diagram if you wish.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Ions, all of the same isotope, are travelling in a vacuum with a speed of 9.6 × 104 m s−1.
The ions are incident normally on a uniform magnetic field of flux density 640 mT. The ions
follow semicircular paths A and B before reaching a detector, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
detector
A B vacuum
uniform magnetic
field, flux density
640 mT
Fig. 6.1
Data for the diameters of the paths are shown in Fig. 6.2.
path diameter / cm
A 6.2
B 12.4
Fig. 6.2
The ions in path B each have charge +1.6 × 10−19 C.
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 174

13
(i) Determine the mass, in u, of the ions in path B.
mass = ..................................................... u [4]
(ii) Suggest and explain quantitatively a reason for the difference in radii of the paths A and
B of the ions.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 175

8 (a) State what is meant by quantisation of charge.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to determine the elementary charge.

A charged oil drop is positioned between two horizontal metal plates, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
+ 680 V
oil drop
7.0 mm
Fig. 8.1
The plates are separated by a distance of 7.0 mm. The lower plate is earthed.
The potential of the upper plate is gradually increased until the drop is held stationary. The
potential for the drop to be stationary is 680 V.
The weight of the oil drop, allowing for the upthrust of the air, is 4.8 × 10−14 N.
Calculate the value for the charge on the oil drop.
charge = ..................................................... C [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/M/J/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 176

17
(c) The student repeats the experiment and determines the following values for the charge on oil
drops.
3.3 × 10−19 C 4.9 × 10−19 C 9.7 × 10−19 C 3.4 × 10−19 C
Use these values to suggest a value for the elementary charge. Explain your working.
elementary charge = ..................................................... C [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 177

6 A solid metal sphere of radius R is isolated in space. The sphere is positively charged so that the
electric potential at its surface is VS. The electric field strength at the surface is ES.
(a) On the axes of Fig. 6.1, show the variation of the electric potential with distance x from the
centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Vs
0.8 Vs
potential
0.6 Vs
0.4 Vs
0.2 Vs
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.1
[3]
(b) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, show the variation of the electric field strength with distance x from
the centre of the sphere for values of x from x = 0 to x = 3R.
1.0 Es
0.8 Es
field
strength 0.6 Es
0.4 Es
0.2 Es
0
0 R 2R 3R
distance x
Fig. 6.2
[3]
[Total: 6]
CEDAR COLLEGE 178

6 (a) By reference to electric field lines, explain why, for points outside an isolated spherical
conductor, the charge on the sphere may be considered to act as a point charge at its centre.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Two isolated protons are separated in a vacuum by a distance x.
(i) Calculate the ratio
electric force between the two protons

.
gravitational force between the two protons
ratio = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) By reference to your answer in (i), suggest why gravitational forces are not considered
when calculating the force between charged particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
CEDAR COLLEGE 179

4 (a) Explain what is meant by the potential energy of a body. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
2
(b) Two deuterium ( 1 H) nuclei each have initial kinetic energy EK and are initially separated
by a large distance.
The nuclei may be considered to be spheres of diameter 3.8 × 10–15 m with their masses
and charges concentrated at their centres.
The nuclei move from their initial positions to their final position of just touching, as
2 2
initially 1H 1H
kinetic energy EK kinetic energy EK
3.8 × 10–15 m
2 2
finally 1H 1H
at rest
Fig. 4.1
(i) For the two nuclei approaching each other, calculate the total change in
1. gravitational potential energy,
energy = ............................................ J [3]
2. electric potential energy.
energy = ............................................ J [3]

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10
CEDAR COLLEGE 180

9
(ii) Use your answers in (i) to show that the initial kinetic energy EK of each nucleus For
is 0.19 MeV. Examiner’s
Use
[2]
(iii) The two nuclei may rebound from each other. Suggest one other effect that could
happen to the two nuclei if the initial kinetic energy of each nucleus is greater than
that calculated in (ii).
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 181

Q17- 3 (a) State what is meant by a line of force in For

Examiner’s
(i) a gravitational field, Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) an electric field.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A charged metal sphere is isolated in space.

State one similarity and one difference between the gravitational force field and the
electric force field around the sphere.
similarity: ..........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
difference: ........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Two horizontal metal plates are separated by a distance of 1.8 cm in a vacuum.
A potential difference of 270 V is maintained between the plates, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
0V
proton
1.8 cm
+270 V
Fig. 3.1
A proton is in the space between the plates.
Explain quantitatively why, when predicting the motion of the proton between the plates,
the gravitational field is not taken into consideration.
[4]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12
CEDAR COLLEGE 182

10
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) An electron is accelerated from rest in a vacuum through a potential difference of
1.2 104 V.
Show that the final speed of the electron is 6.5 107 m s–1.
[2]
(b) The accelerated electron now enters a region of uniform magnetic field acting into the
plane of the paper, as illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
magnetic field into

plane of paper
+
+
path of
+
+
electron
+
+
Fig. 5.1
(i) Describe the path of the electron as it passes through, and beyond, the region of
the magnetic field. You may draw on Fig. 5.1 if you wish.
path within field: ........................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
path beyond field: ....................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 183

© UCLES 2005 9702/04/O/N/05
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) State and explain the effect on the magnitude of the deflection of the electron in the
magnetic field if, separately,
1. the potential difference accelerating the electron is reduced,
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... [2]
2. the magnetic field strength is increased.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 184

2 (a)
(-1 for each error or omission) ........................................ B2 [2]
(b) ANSWERS
heat lost by liquid gold = 0.95m x 129 x ∆T.................................. C1
heat gained (silver) = 0.05m x 235 x (1340 – 300) + 0.05m x 105 000..C1, C1
122.5m∆T = 17 470m
1
∆T = 143 K.......................................................................................C1
temperature = 143 + 1340 = 1483 K................................................A1 [5]
3 (a) f0 is at natural frequency of spring (system) ................................. B1

this is at the driver frequency ....................................................... B1 [2]
(b) line: amplitude less at all frequencies ......................................... B1

peak flatter .......................................................................... B1
peak at f0 or slightly below f0 ................................................ B1 [3]
(c) (aluminium) sheet cuts the magnetic flux/field.............................. B1

(so) currents/e.m.f. induced in the (metal) sheet .......................... B1
these currents dissipate energy ...................................................M1
less energy available for the oscillations ...................................... A1
so amplitude smaller .................................................................... A0 [4]
(‘current opposes motion of sheet’ scores one of the last two
marks)
24 (a) field causes forces on the electrons .............................................M1

and the nucleus in opposite directions ......................................... A1
(field causes) electrons (to be) stripped off the atom.................... B1 [3]
(b) (i) E = Q/4!ε0r2 .....................................................................................C1

20 x 103 x 102 = Q/(4! x 8.85 x 10-12 x 0.212 ....................................C1
Page 3 charge = 9.8 x 10-6 CMark Scheme Syllabus
.......................................................................A1 Paper
[3]
(ii) V =©Q/4!ε 0r
University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
= (9.8 x 10-6 )/(4! x 8.85 x 10-12 x 0.21) ........................................C1
= 4.2 x 105 V................................................................................A1 [2]
(c) e.g. sphere not smooth, humid air, etc ............................................B1 [1]
5 (a) centripetal force = mv2 /r...................................................................B1

magnetic force F = Bqv....................................................................B1
(hence) mv2 /r = Bqv .........................................................................B1
r = mv/Bq .........................................................................................A0 [3]
(b) r! /r" = (m! /m") x (q" /q!) ...................................................................C1

= (4 x 1.66 x 10-27)/(9.11 x 10-31 x 2)
= 3.64 x 103 ...............................................................................A2 [3]
(c) (i) r! = (4 x 1.66 x 10-27 x 1.5 x 106 )/(1.2 x 10-3 x 2 x 1.6 x 10-19 )
= 25.9 m ......................................................................................A2
(ii) r" = 25.9 x 3.64 x 103 = 7.13 x 10-3 m ..............................................A1 [3]
(d) (i) deflected upwards............................................................................B1

but close to original direction ...........................................................B1
CEDAR COLLEGE
(ii) opposite direction to "-particle and ‘through side’ ...........................B1 185[3]
6 (a) greater binding energy gives rise to release of energy ................... M1

so must be yttrium ...........................................................................A1 [2]
not influenced by another planet etc. B1 [1]
M = 0.0384 kg A1 [3]
2 (a) (ii)
(on melting,)
decreasingbonds
peakbetween molecules are broken/weakened
height/amplitude B1 [1]
or molecules further apart/are able to slide over one another B1
kinetic energy unchanged so no temperature change B1
35 (a) potential energy increased/changed
field strength = potential gradientso
[- energy
sign notrequired
required] B1 [1]B1 [3]
[allow E = ∆V/∆x but not E = V/d]
(b) thermal energy/heat required to convert unit mass of solid to liquid M1
(b) No field for x < r B1
with no change in temperature/ at its normal boiling point A1 [2]
for x > r, curve in correct direction, not going to zero B1
discontinuity at x = r (vertical line required) B1 [3]
(c) (i) thermal energy lost by water = 0.16 × 4.2 x 100
= 67.2 kJ C1
6 (a) (i) flux/field in core
67.2 = 0.205 × Lmust be changing M1 C1
L = 328 kJ kg–1
so that an e.m.f./current is induced in the secondary A1 [2]A1 [3]
(ii) power
more energy
= VI (than calculated) melts ice M1 M1
so, (calculated)
output L is lowersothan
power is constant if VSthe acceptedISvalue
increases, decreases A1 [2]A1 [2]
(b) (i) same shape and phase as IP graph B1 [1]

34 (a) field strength = potential gradient M1
correct
(ii) samesign OR directions discussed
frequency M1 A1 [2]
correct phase w.r.t. Fig. 6.3 A1 [2]
(b) area is 21.2 cm2 ± 0.4 cm2 C2
(iii) ½π rad±or
(if outside cm2 but within ± 0.8 cm2, allow 1 mark)
0.490° B1 [1]
1.0 cm represents (1.0 × 10–2 × 2.5 × 103 =) 25 V
2
C1
potential difference = 530 V A1 [4]
7 (a) curve levelling out (at 1.4 µg) M1
correct shape judged by masses at nT½ A1 [2]
2
(c) ½mv[for = second
qV mark, values must be marked on y-axis)
½ × 9.1 × 10–31 × v2 = 1.6 × 10–19 × 530 C1
(b) (i) 107×ms
N0 = ×(1.4
v = 1.37 –1
10-6 × 6.02 × 1023)/56 C1 A1 [2]
= 1.5 × 1016 A1 [2]
(d) (i) d=0 B1 [1]
(ii) A = λN C1
-5 -1
(ii) = ln2/(2.6 ×decreases
λacceleration 3600) (= 7.4 × 10
then s )
increases C1 B1
12
A = 1.11
some × 10 Bq analysis (e.g. minimum at 4.0 cm)
quantitative A1 [3]B1 [2]
(any suggestion that acceleration becomes zero or that there is a
(c) 1/10 of original
deceleration mass0/2)
scores of Manganese remains C1
0.10 = exp(-ln2 × t/2.6)
t = 8.63 hours © UCLES 2007 A1 [2]
[use of 1/9, giving answer 8.24 hrs scores 1 mark]
CEDAR COLLEGE 186

(ii) 1 4.0 Hz ................................................................................................................ B1
2 0.50 cm (allow ±0.03 cm) ................................................................................ B1 [2]

45 (a) (i) either lines directed
GCE A/AS away from sphere
LEVEL – May/June 2008 9702 04
or lines go from positive to negative
3 (a) (i) oramplitudeline shows
= 0.5 cm direction of force on positive charge ....................................... M1A1 [1]
so positively charged ............................................................................................ A1 [2]
(ii) period = 0.8 s A1 [1]
(ii) either all lines (appear to) radiate from centre
or all lines are normal to surface of sphere ................................................... B1 [1]
(b) (i) ω = 2π / T C1
–1
= 7.85 rad s
(b) tangent to curve
correct use of...........................................................................................................
v = ω √(x02 – x2) B1B1
in correct position and direction –2 2 ...................................................................................
–2 2 B1 [2]
= 7.85 × √({0.5 × 10 } – {0.2 × 10 } )
–1
= 3.6 cm s A1 [3]
(if tangent drawn -9 or clearly implied-12 (B1)
(c) (i) V = (0.76 × 10–1 ) / (4π × 8.85 × 10 × 0.024) ..................................................... C1
3.6=± 285
0.3 cm s (A2)
V ........................................................................................................... A1 [2]
but allow 1 mark for > ±0.3 but Ğ ±0.6 cm s–1)
(ii) negative charge is induced on (inside of) box ...................................................... M1
(ii) formula
d = 15.8 cm to isolated (point) charge
applies A1 [1]
OR less work done moving test charge from infinity .......................................... A1
so potential is lower .............................................................................................. A1 [3]
(c) (i) (continuous) loss of energy / reduction in
amplitude (from the oscillating system) B1
(d) eithercaused by forcefield
gravitational acting in opposite
is always direction to the motion / friction /
attractive
or viscous forces
field lines must be directed towards both box and sphere .............................. B1B1 [1][2]
(ii) same period / small increase in period B1

line displacement always less than that on Fig.3.2 (ignore first T/4) M1
peak progressively smaller A1 [3]
4 (a) work done moving unit positive charge M1

from infinity to the point A1 [2]
6 (b) (i) x = 18 cm A1 [1]
(ii) VA + VB = 0 C1
(3.6 × 10–9) / (4πε0 × 18 × 10–2) + q / (4πε0 × 12 × 10–2) = 0 C1
q = –2.4 × 10–9 C © UCLES 2007 A1 [3]
(use of VA = VB giving 2.4 × 10 –9 C scores one mark)
(c) field strength = (–) gradient of graph B1

force = charge × gradient / field strength or force ∝ gradient B1
force largest at x = 27 cm B1 [3]
5 (a) at t = 1.0 s, V = 2.5 V C1

energy = ½CV 2 C1
0.13 = ½ × C × (8.02 – 2.52) M1
C = 4500 µF A0 [3]
(b) use of two capacitors in series in all branches of combination M1

connected into correct parallel arrangement A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 187
© UCLES 2008
7
5 (a) work done per / on unit positive charge .....................................................................M1
moving charge from infinity to the point ..................................................................... A1 [2]
(b) (i) α-particle and gold nucleus repel each other ..................................................... B1
all kinetic energy of α-particle converted into electric potential energy .............. B1 [2]
(ii) 1 potential energy = (79 × 2 × {1.6 × 10-19}2) / (4π × 8.85 × 10-12 × d) .............. C1
kinetic energy = 4.8 × 1.6 × 10-13 = 7.68 × 10-13 J ........................................... C1
equating to give d = 4.7 × 10-14 m ..................................................................... A1 [3]
(ii) 2 F = Qq / 4πε0d × 1 / d = 7.68 × 10-13 × 1 / (4.7 × 10-14) .............................. C1

= 16 N ....................................................................................................... A1 [2]
[Total: 9]
6 (a) concentric circles …(at least three lines) ................................................................M1

with increasing separation ......................................................................................... A1
correct direction clear ................................................................................................ B1 [3]
Page
(b) (i)3 correct position
Mark Scheme:
to left of wire Teachers’ version Syllabus
.............................................................................. Paper[1]
B1
(ii) B = (4π × 10-7 × 1.7) / (2π × 1.9 × 10-2) ............................................................. C1
48 (a) ability to=do × 10-5 T ................................................................................................. A1B1 [2]
work
1.8
as a result of the position/shape, etc. of an object B1 [2]
(c) distance ∝ current ................................................................................................... C1

(b) (i) 1 ∆E
current = (2.8 = GMm
gpe / 1.9) × 1.7/ r C1
(6.67 × 10–11 × {2 × 1.66 × 10–27}2) / (3.8 × 10–15)
= 2.5 A =........................................................................................................ A1C1 [2]
= 1.93 × 10–49 J A1 [3]
[Total: 8]
2 ∆Eepe = Qq / 4πε0r C1
= (1.6 × 10–19)2 / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 3.8 × 10–15) C1
7 (a) e.g. more (output)= power available
6.06 × 10 J –14
A1 [3]
e.g. less ripple for same smoothing capacitor
any sensible suggestion ............................................................................................ B1 [1]
–14
EK = 3.03 × 10 J
=
(b) (i) curve(3.03 × 10–14half-wave
showing
–13
) / 1.6 × 10rectification ................................................................. B1M1 [1]
= 0.19 MeV A0 [2]
(ii) similar to (i) but phase shift of 180° .................................................................... B1 [1]
(iii) fusion may occur / may break into sub-nuclear particles B1 [1]
(c) (i) correct symbol, connected in parallel with R ...................................................... B1 [1]

5 (a) (i) VH depends on angle between (plane of) probe and B-field B1
(ii) either
1 larger max when
VHcapacitor plane capacitor
/ second and B-field in are normal
parallel withtoReach other
..................................... B1 [1]
or VH zero
(not increase R)when plane and B-field are parallel
2 same Hpeak valueson...........................................................................................
or V depends sine of angle between plane and B-field B1B1 [2]
correct shape giving less ripple .......................................................................... B1 [2]
(ii) 1 calculates VHr at least three times M1
to 1 s.f. constant so valid or approx constant so valid [Total: 7]
or to 2 s.f., not constant so invalid A1 [2]
2 straight line passes through origin B1 [1]

© UCLES 2009
CEDAR(b)
COLLEGE
(i) e.m.f. induced is proportional / equal to 188
M1
rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1
constant field in coil / flux (linkage) of coil does not change B1 [3]
in 0.012 kg of carbon-12 A1 [2]

(b) pV = NkT or pVGCE = nRT AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2010 9702 C1 41
79
5
1.1 × 10up
either pointing
(a) arrow ×the × 10–2 = N × 1.38 × 10–23 × 298
6.5page B1 [1]
or 1.1 × 105 × 6.5 × 10–2 = n × 8.31 × 298 and n = N / 6.02 × 1023 C1
N = 1.7 × 1024 A1 [4]
(b) (i) Eq = Bqv C1
v = (12 × 103) / (930 × 10–6) C1
3 (a) acceleration
= 1.3/ force
× 107proportional
m s–1 to displacement from a fixed point M1A1 [3]
direction
(ii) Bqv to= displacement
mv 2 / r A1 C1 [2]
7 –2 –6
q/m = (1.3 × 10 ) / (7.9 × 10 × 930 × 10 ) C1
= 1.8 × 1011 C kg–1 A1 [3]
8 direction to displacement
(a) momentum conservation hence momenta of photons are equal (but opposite) B1 M1 [2]
same momentum so same energy A1 [2]
(ii) ω 2 = (Aρg / m) C1
ω = 2πf C1
(2
(b) (i) (∆)E 1.5)2 =2 ({4.5 × 10–4 × 1.0 × 103 × 9.81} / m)
× π=× (∆)mc C1 C1
m = 50= g1.2 × 10–28 × (3.0 × 108)2 A1 [4]
= 1.08 × 10–11 J A1 [2]
10
4 workEdone=inhc
(a) (ii) bringing unit positive charge M1
/λ
from infinity (to that point) A1 [2]
λ = (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (1.08 × 10–11) C1
= 1.84 × 10–14 m A1 [2]
(b) (i) field strength is potential gradient B1 [1]
(iii) λ = h/p
(ii) pfield strength × 10–34) / (1.84
= (6.63 proportional × 10–14
to force ) particle Q)
(on B1 C1
–20
= 3.6 × 10 N s
potential gradient proportional to gradient of (potential energy) graph B1 A1 [2]
so force is proportional to the gradient of the graph A0 [2]
GCE AS/A LEVELSection B 2011
– May/June 9702 41
9 (a)
(c) (i) point=X5.1
energy shown × 10–19 (J)
× 1.6correctly C1B1 [1]
potential energy = Q1Q2 / 4πε0r C1
–19very large / infinite
(ii)
5.1 op-amp
× 1.6 × 10has = (1.6 × 10–19)2 / 4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × r
gain C1M1
–10
non-inverting
r = 2.8 × 10 m input is at earth (potential) / earthed / at 0 V A1M1 [4]
if amplifier is © not
University of Cambridge
to saturate, International
inverting input mustExaminations
be (almost) 2011
at earth potential / 0 (V) same potential as inverting input A1 [3]
(d) (i) work is got out as x decreases M1
so opposite sign A1 [2]
(b) (i) total input resistance = 1.2 kΩ C1
(ii) (amplifier)
energy would gain be
(= doubled
–4.2 / 1.2) = –3.5 B1C1
(voltmeter) reading = –3.5 × –1.5
gradient would be increased B1 [2]
= 5.25 V A1 [3]
(total disregard of signs or incorrect sign in answer, max 2 marks)
5 (a) region (of space) where there is a force M1
(ii) (lesson
either bright so) resistance
/ produced of LDR
by magnetic increases
pole M1
or (amplifier) gain decreases
on / produced by current carrying conductor / moving charge A1M1 [2]
(voltmeter) reading decreases A1 [3]
(b) (i) force on particle is (always) normal to velocity / direction of travel B1

speed of particle is constant B1 [2]
(ii) magnetic force provides the centripetal force B1

mv2 / r = Bqv M1
r = mv / Bq A0 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE © UCLES 2010 189

(c) (i) direction from ‘bottom to top’ of diagram B1 [1]
(ii) radius proportional to momentum C1

as magnet
light moves in coil
damping A1
A1 [2]
current in resistor gives rise to a heating effect M1
(iii) thermal
period =energy
0.80 sis derived from energy of oscillation of the magnet A1
C1 [4]
frequency = 1.25 Hz (period not 0.8 s, then 0/2) A1 [2]
11
4 (a) (i) zero field (strength) inside spheres B1 [1]
(b) (i) (induced) e.m.f. is proportional to M1
(ii) either field strength isof
rate of change/cutting zero
(magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
or the fields are in opposite directions M1
at is
(ii) a current a point
inducedbetween
in the the
coil spheres A1
M1 [2]
as magnet moves in coil A1
current in resistor gives rise to a heating effect M1
(b) (i) field strength
thermal energyis is
(–)derived
potential gradient
from energy(not V/x)
of oscillation of the magnet B1
A1 [1]
[4]
(ii) 1. field strength has maximum value B1

4 (a) (i) zeroat x =(strength)
field 11.4 cm inside spheres B1
B1 [2]
[1]
(ii) 2. field
either strength
field strengthis zero
is zero B1
or either at x =
the fields are 7.9
in cm (allowdirections
opposite ±0.3 cm) M1
or at a atpoint between the spherescm to 12 cm
0 to 1.4 cm or 11.4 B1
A1 [2]
[2]
5 (a)
(b) (i)
(i) Bqv(sinθ) or Bqv(cosθ)
field strength is (–) potential gradient (not V/x) B1
B1 [1]
[1]
(ii)
(ii) qE
1. field strength has maximum value B1
B1 [1]
at x = 11.4 cm B1 [2]
(b) FB must
2. be opposite
field strengthinisdirection
zero to FE B1
B1
so magnetic field into plane
either at x = 7.9 cm of paper
(allow ±0.3 cm) B1 [2]
or at 0 to 1.4 cm or 11.4 cm to 12 cm B1 [2]
12
5 (a) (i) Bqv(sinθ) or Bqv(cosθ) B1 [1]
(ii) qE B1 [1]
(b) FB must be opposite in direction to FE B1

so magnetic field into plane of paper B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 190

(c) (i) graph: horizontal line, y-intercept = 7.0 mJ with end-points of line at
(b) sinusoidal wave +2.8withcmallandvalues positive
–2.8 cm B1
B1 [1]
all values positive, all peaks at EK and energy = 0 at t = 0 B1
period
(ii) graph: s
= 0.30reasonable curve B1
B1 [3]
with maximum at (0,7.0) end-points of line at (–2.8, 0)
13 and (+2.8, 0) B1 [2]
5 (a) force per unit positive charge acting on a stationary charge B1 [1]
(iii) graph: inverted version of (ii) M1
with intersections
2
at (–2.0, 3.5) and (+2.0, 3.5) A1 [2]
E = marks
(b) (i) (Allow Q / 4πεin
0 r (iii), but not in (ii), if graphs K & P are not labelled) C1
Q = 1.8 × 104 × 102 × 4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × (25 × 10–2 )2 M1
Q = 1.25 × 10–5 C = 12.5 µC A0 [2]
(ii) V = Q / 4πε0 r
= (1.25 × 10–5 ) / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 25 × 10–2 ) C1
5
3 (a) sum of=potential
4.5 × 10energyV and kinetic energy of atoms/molecules/particles M1
A1 [2]
reference toallow
(Do not random use(distribution)
of V = Er unless explained) A1 [2]
(b) (i) as lattice structure is ‘broken’/bonds broken/forces between

molecules reduced (not molecules separate) B1
no change in kinetic energy, potential energy increases M1
internal energy increases A1 [3]
(ii) either molecules/atoms/particles move faster/ <c2> is increasing

or kinetic energy increases with temperature (increases) B1
no change in potential energy, kinetic energy increases M1
14
4 (a) (i) as r decreases, energy decreases/work got out (due to) M1
attraction so point mass is negatively charged A1 [2]
(ii) electric potential energy = charge × electric potential B1

field strength = gradient of potential energy graph/charge A0 [2]
(b) tangent drawn at (4.0, 14.5) B1
gradient = 3.6 × 10–24 A2
(for < ±0.3 allow 2 marks, for < ±0.6 allow 1 mark)
field strength = (3.6 × 10–24) / (1.6 × 10–19)
= 2.3 × 10–5 V m–1 (allow ecf from gradient value) A1 [4]
(one point solution for gradient leading to 2.3 × 10–5 Vm–1 scores 1 mark only)
CEDAR COLLEGE 191

(c) new reading is 2.4√2 g C1
either changes between +3.4 g and –3.4 g
or total change is 6.8 g A1 [2]
15
6 (a) oil drop charged by friction/beta source B1
between parallel metal plates B1
plates are horizontal (1)
adjustable potential difference/field between plates B1
until oil drop is stationary B1
mg = q × V/d B1
symbols explained (1)
oil drop viewed through microscope (1)
m determined from terminal speed of drop (when p.d. is zero) (1)
(any two extras, 1 each) B2 [7]
(b) 3.2 × 10–19 C A1 [1]
7 (a) minimum energy to remove an electron from the metal/surface B1 [1]
(b) gradient = 4.17 × 10–15 (allow 4.1 → 4.3) C1

h = 4.15 × 10–15 × 1.6 × 10–19 or h = 4.1 to 4.3 × 10–15 eV s A1
= 6.6 × 10–34 J s A0 [2]
(c) graph: straight line parallel to given line
16
3 (a) (i) (tangent to line gives) direction of force on a (small test) mass B1 [1]
with intercept at any higher frequency B1
intercept at between 6.9 × 1014 Hz and 7.1 × 1014 Hz B1 [3]
charge is positive A1 [2]
(b) similarity:
e.g. radial fields
greater separation of lines with increased distance from sphere
field strength ∝ 1 / (distance to centre of sphere)2
(allow any sensible answer) B1
difference: © University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012

e.g. gravitational force (always) towards sphere B1
electric force direction depends on sign of charge on sphere / towards or
away from sphere B1
e.g. gravitational field/force is attractive (B1)
electric field/force is attractive or repulsive (B1)
(allow any sensible comparison) [3]
(c) gravitational force = 1.67 × 10–27 × 9.81

= 1.6 × 10–26 N A1
electric force = 1.6 × 10–19 × 270 / (1.8 × 10–2) C1
= 2.4 × 10–15 N A1
electric force very much greater than gravitational force B1 [4]
4 (a) force on proton is normal to velocity and field M1

provides centripetal force (for circular motion) A1 [2]
(b) magnetic force = Bqv B1

centripetal force = mrω2 or mv2/r
CEDAR COLLEGE B1
192
v = rω B1
Bqv = Bqrω = mrω2
ω = Bq/m A1 [4]
y = 12.0→13.0) A1 [2]
1 (a) force proportional to product of the two masses and inversely proportional to the
square
(ii) of their
at max. separation
amplitude potential energy is total energy B1M1
either reference
total energy to point
= 4.0 mJmasses or separation >> ‘size’ of masses B1 A1 [2]
17
4 (b)
(a) gravitational force provides
(i) force2 proportional totheproduct
centripetal
of force
(two) charges and inversely B1
/ R = mRω2to square of separation
GMmproportional M1M1
where m is theto
reference mass
pointofcharges
the planet A1 A1 [2]
3 2
GM = R ω A0 [3]
(ii) F = 2 × (1.6 × 10–19)2 / {4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × (20 × 10–6)2} C1
F = 1.15 × 10–18 N A1 [2]
(c) ω = 2π / T C1
either Mstar / MSun = (Rstar / RSun)3 × (TSun / Tstar)2
(b) (i) force Mstar 43 ×charge
per=unit (½)2 × 2.0 × 1030 M1C1
on either=a3.2 × 1031 kg
stationary charge A1 [3]
2
star = (2π)
or or aMpositive Rstar3 / GT2
charge (C1)
A1 [2]
= {(2π)2 × (6.0 × 1011)3} / {6.67 × 10–11 × (2 × 365 × 24 × 3600)2} (C1)
31
(ii) 1. electric = 3.2field is a kg
× 10 vector quantity (A1)
electric fields are in opposite directions
2 (a) (i) sum charges
of kineticrepel
and potential energies of the molecules M1
reference to random
Any two of the above, distribution
1 each B2 A1 [2]
(ii) for graph:

2. ideal line
gas, noalways betweenforces
intermolecular given lines M1M1
so no potential
crosses energy
x-axis (only kinetic)
between 11.0 µm and 12.3 µm A1 A1 [2]
reasonable shape for curve A1 [3]
(b) (i) either change in kinetic energy = 3/2 × 1.38 × 10–23 × 1.0 × 6.02 × 1023 × 180 C1
5 (a) (i) field shown as right to left = 2240 J B1 A1 [2]
[1]
or R = kNA
energy
(ii) lines are more =spaced
3/2 × 1.0
out×at8.31
ends× 180 (C1)
B1 [1]
= 2240 J (A1)
(b) (ii)
Hall increase in internal
voltage depends onenergy
angle = heat supplied + work done on system M1B1
2240 = energy supplied
either between field and plane– 1500
of probe C1
energy supplied
or maximum = 3740
when field J to plane of probe
normal A1 [3]
or zero when field parallel to plane of probe A1 [2]
18
3 (a) work done bringing unit positive charge M1
(c) from infinity (toe.m.f.
(i) (induced) the point)
proportional to rate M1A1 [2]
of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
(allow rate of cutting of flux)
(b) (i) either both potentials are positive / same sign M1
(ii) e.g. moveso same sign
coil towards/away from solenoid A1 [2]
e.g. rotate coil are positive & negative (so fields in opposite directions)
or gradients (M1)
e.g. varysocurrent
same sign
in solenoid (A1)
e.g. insert iron core into solenoid
(ii) the individual potentials are summed B1 [1]
(any three sensible suggestions, 1 each) B3 [3]
(iii) allow value of x between 10 nm and 13 nm A1 [1]
(iv) V = 0.43 V (allow 0.42 V → 0.44 V) M1

energy = 2 × 1.6 × 10–19 × 0.43 A1
= 1.4 × 10–19 J A1 [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE 193

19
6 (a) either constant speed parallel to plate
or accelerated motion / force normal to plate / in direction field B1
so not circular A0 [1]
(b) (i) direction of force due to magnetic field opposite to that due to electric field B1
magnetic field into plane of page B1 [2]
(ii) force due to magnetic field = force due to electric field B1

Bqv = qE
B =E/v C1
= (2.8 × 104) / (4.7 × 105)
= 6.0 × 10–2 T A1 [3]
(b) energy lost (as thermal energy) in resistance/wires/battery/resistor B1 [1]

(c) (i) no change
(award / not deviated
only if answer in (a)(i) > answer in (a)(ii)2) B1 [1]
(ii) deviated upwards B1 [1]

7 (a) graph: VH increases from zero when current switched on B1
V then /non-zero
(iii) no change not deviated
constant B1
B1 [1]
H
VH returns to zero when current switched off B1 [3]
7 (a) (i) minimum photon energy B1
(b) (i) minimum
(induced) energy to remove an
e.m.f. proportional to electron
rate (from the surface) B1
M1 [2]
of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1 [2]
(ii) either maximum KE is photon energy – work function energy
(ii) or
pulse asmax KE when
current electron
is being ejected
switched on from the surface B1
B1
energies lower than max because
zero e.m.f. when current in coil energy required to bring electron to B1
the surface
pulse in opposite direction when switching off B1
B1 [2]
[3]
20
8 (b)
(a) (i) threshold
discrete frequency
and equal = 1.0
amounts 1015 Hz
(of× charge) (allow ±0.05 × 1015) C1
B1 [1]
work
allow: function
discrete energyof 1.6
amounts = hf×0 10–19C/elementary charge/e C1
–34 15
integral multiples of 1.66.63
= × 10×–1910 × 1.0 × 10charge/e
C/elementary
–19
= 6.63 × 10 J A1 [3]
(allow alternative approaches based on use of co-ordinates of points on
the=line)
(b) weight qV / d
4.8 × 10–14 = (q × 680)/(7.0 × 10–3) C1
(ii) sketch: –19
straight line with same gradient M1
q = 4.9 × 10 C A1 [2]
displaced to right A1 [2]
(iii) intensity determines number of photons arriving per unit time B1

(c) elementary charge = 1.6 × 10–19 C (allow 1.6 × 10–19 C to 1.7 × 10–19 C ) M0
intensity determines number of electrons per unit time (not energy) B1 [2]
either the values are (approximately) multiples of this
or it is a common factor C1
it is the highest common factor A1 [2]
8 (a) probability of decay (of a nucleus) / fraction of number of nuclei in sample
that decay M1
per unit time A1 [2]
9 (a) e.g. no time delay between illumination and emission
(allow λ =(dN / dt) / N with symbols explained – (M1), (A1) )
max. (kinetic) energy of electron dependent on frequency
max. (kinetic) energy of electron independent of intensity
rate of emission of electrons dependent on/proportional to intensity
(b) (i)
(anynumber
three separate 6.02 × 1023)one
= (1.2 ×statements, / 235
mark each, maximum 3) C1
B3 [3]
= 3.1 × 1021 A1 [2]
(b) (i) (photon) interaction with electron may be below surface B1

energy required to bring electron to surface B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE © Cambridge International Examinations 2013 194
to hold nucleus together A1 [3]
(c) e.g. some microwave leakage from the cooker
e.g.(Do
container for ifthe
not allow FGwater is (a)
> FE in alsoorheated
one of the forces not calculated in (a))
(any sensible suggestion) B1 [1]
(ii) outside nucleus there is repulsion between protons B1
either attractive2 force must act only in nucleus
21
4 (a) (i) orFE R 2 / 4πεrange,
Q1Qshort 0r C1
if not all nuclei would stick together B1 [2]
= = = = R 8.99 × 109 × (1.6 × 10–19)2 / (2.0 × 10–15)2
R 58 N A1 [2]
5 (a) only curve with decreasing gradient M1
(ii) FG R Gm
acceptable value / r2 xR 0 and does not reach zero
1m2near C1
A1 [2]
= = = R 6.67 × 10–11 × (1.67 × 10–27)2 / (2.0 × 10–15)2
–35
= = =
(if graph 4.7less
Rline × 10than N4.0 cm do not allow A1 mark) A1 [2]
(no credit if graph line has positive and negative values of VH)
(b) (i) force of repulsion (much) greater than force of attraction B1
must be some other force of attraction M1
(b) graph: tofrom
hold 0nucleus
to 2T, two together
cycles of a sinusoidal wave A1
M1 [3]
all peaks above 3.5 mV C1
peaks(Do not allow
at 4.95 / 5.0 mV > FE in
if FG(allow 4.8(a)
mV ortoone
5.2 of the forces not calculated in (a))
mV) A1 [3]
(ii) outside nucleus there is repulsion between protons B1

inducedattractive
(c) e.m.f.either force
in coil when must actfield
magnetic only in nucleus
/ flux is changing / cutting B1
or if not short range, all nuclei would stick together B1 [2]
either at each position, magnetic field does not vary
so no e.m.f. is induced in the coil / no reading on the millivoltmeter
5 only at
(a) or curve
eachwith decreasing
position, switchgradient
off current and take millivoltmeter reading M1
acceptable value near xR 0 and
or at each position, rapidly doescoil
remove notfrom
reach zero
field and take meter reading A1
B1 [2]
[2]
(if graph line less than 4.0 cm do not allow A1 mark)

22
6 (no credit
(a) electric andif magnetic
graph linefields
has positive and
normal to other values of VH)
negative
each B1
either charged particle enters region normal to both fields

graph:
(b) or from B0 direction
correct to 2T, twow.r.t.
cycles of zero
E for a sinusoidal wave
deflection M1
B1
all peaks above 3.5 mV
for no deflection, v R E / B C1
B1 [3]
peaks at 4.95 / 5.0 mV (allow 4.8 mV to 5.2 mV) A1 [3]
(no credit if magnetic field region clearly not overlapping with electric field region)
(c) e.m.f. induced in coilGCE
whenA magnetic
LEVEL – field / flux is2014
May/June changing / cutting 9702 B1
42
(b) (i) m RatBqr

either each/ v position, magnetic field does not vary C1
= = so =no e.m.f.
R=(640 × 10–3 ×in1.6
is induced 10–19/ no
the× coil × 10–2
reading
× 6.2 on) /the × 104 )
(9.6millivoltmeter C1
or = at each –26
position,
= = R=6.61 × 10 switch
kg off current and take millivoltmeter reading C1
= = or = at each © Cambridge
R=(6.61 × 10 ) / (1.66remove
position,
–26rapidly
× 10International Examinations
–27 coil from
)u 2014
field and take meter reading B1 [2]
= = = R=40 u A1 [4]
6 (a) electric and magnetic fields normal to each other B1
(ii) q / m ∝ 1 / r or m constant and q ∝ 1 / r B1
eitherq / mcharged
for A is particle enters
twice that for Bregion normal to both fields B1
or correct B direction w.r.t.
ions in path A have (same E for zero
mass deflection
but) twice the charge (of ions in path B) B1
B1 [3]
for no deflection, v R E / B B1 [3]
7 (a) (no credit

angle if magnetic
subtended field
at the region
centre of clearly
a circlenot overlapping with electric field region) B1
by an arc equal in length to the radius B1 [2]
(b) (i) arc R distance × angle C1

diameter R 3.8 × 105 × 9.7 × 10–6
= = = R 3.7 km
© Cambridge International Examinations 2014 A1 [2]
(ii) Mars is (much) further from Earth / away (answer must be comparative) B1
angle (at telescope is much) smaller B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 195

8 (a) photon energy R hc / λ
R (6.63 × 10–34 × 3.0 × 108) / (590 × 10–9 ) C1
R 3.37 × 10–19 J C1
(ii) pulse as current is being switched on B1
zero e.m.f. when current in coil B1
pulse in opposite direction when switching off B1 [3]
23
8 (a) discrete and equal amounts (of charge) B1 [1]
Page 4allow: discrete amounts of 1.6Mark Scheme
× 10–19 C/elementary charge/e Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A
–19 Level – May/June
integral multiples of 1.6 × 10 C/elementary charge/e 2016 9702 41
5 (a) (i) 1011 A1 [1]

(b) weight = qV / d
(ii)
4.8 × 10–14 = (q × 680)/(7.0 × 10–3) C1
q = 4.9 ×010–190.25
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 A1 [2]
1011 0110 1000 1110 0101 0011 0001

(c) elementary charge = 1.6 × 10–19 C (allow 1.6 × 10–19 C to 1.7 × 10–19 C ) M0
eitherAllthe values are
6 correct, (approximately)
2 marks. 5 correct, 1multiples
mark. of this A2 [2]
or it is a common factor C1
it is the highest common factor A1 [2]
(b) sketch: 6 horizontal steps of width 0.25 ms shown M1
9 (a) e.g. noat
steps time delayheights
correct between
andillumination and emission
all steps shown A1
max. (kinetic) energy of electron dependent on frequency
max.
steps (kinetic)
shown energy
in correct of electron
time intervalsindependent of intensity A1 [3]
rate of emission of electrons dependent on/proportional to intensity
(any three separate statements, one mark each, maximum 3) B3 [3]
(c) increase sampling frequency/rate M1
(b) (i) (photon)
so that interaction with
step width/depth electron may be below surface
is reduced B1
A1
energy required to bring electron to surface B1 [2]
increase number of bits (in each number) M1
so that step height is reduced A1 [4]
24
6 (a) sketch: from x = 0 to x = R, potential is constant at VS B1
smooth curve through (R, VS) and (2R, 0.5VS) B1
smooth curve continues to (3R, 0.33VS) B1 [3]
(b) sketch: from x = 0 to x = R, field strength is zero B1
smooth curve through (R, E) and International

© Cambridge (2R, 0.25E)Examinations 2014 B1
smooth curve continues to (3R, 0.11E) B1 [3]
7 (a) line has non-zero intercept/line does not pass through origin B1
charge is/should be proportional to potential (difference)

or
charge is/should be zero when p.d. is zero
(therefore there is a systematic error) B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 196

or
maximum attenuation per unit length calculated to be 2.2 dB km–1 (M1)

2.2 dB km–1 > 2.0 dB km–1 so yes (A1) [2]
256 (a) lines perpendicular to surface

or
lines are radial M1
lines appear to come from centre A1 [2]
(b) (i) FE = (1.6 × 10–19 )2 / 4πε0 x2 C1
FG = G × (1.67 × 10–27 )2 / x2 C1
FE / FG = (1.6 × 10–19 )2 × (8.99 × 109 ) / [(1.67×10–27 )2 × (6.67×10–11)]

= 1.2 (1.24) × 1036 A1 [3]
(ii) FE !" FG B1 [1]

264 (a) ability to do work B1
as a result of the position/shape, etc. of an object B1 [2]
(b) (i) 1 ∆Egpe = GMm / r C1

= (6.67 × 10–11 × {2 × 1.66 × 10–27}2) / (3.8 × 10–15) C1
= 1.93 × 10–49 J A1 [3]
2 ∆Eepe = Qq / 4πε0r C1
= (1.6 × 10–19)2 / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 3.8 × 10–15) C1
= 6.06 × 10–14 J A1 [3]

EK = 3.03 × 10–14 J
= (3.03 × 10–14) / 1.6 × 10–13 M1
= 0.19 MeV A0 [2]
(iii) fusion may occur / may break into sub-nuclear particles B1 [1]
5 (a) (i) VH depends on angle between (plane of) probe and B-field B1
either VH max when plane and B-field are normal to each other
or VH zero when plane and B-field are parallel
or VH depends on sine of angle between plane and B-field B1 [2]
(ii) 1 calculates VHr at least three times M1

to 1 s.f. constant so valid or approx constant so valid
or to 2 s.f., not constant so invalid A1 [2]
2 straight line passes through origin B1 [1]
(b) (i) e.m.f. induced is proportional / equal to M1

rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) A1
constant field in coil / flux (linkage) of coil does not change B1 [3]
(ii) e.g. vary current (in wire) / switch current on or off / use a.c. current
rotate coil
CEDAR COLLEGE move coil towards / away from wire (1 mark each, max 3) 197
B3 [3]
6 (a) all four diodes correct to give output, regardless of polarity M1

27 3 (a) (i) (tangent to line gives) direction of force on a (small test) mass B1 [1

charge is positive A1 [2
(b) similarity:
e.g. radial fields
greater separation of lines with increased distance from sphere
field strength ∝ 1 / (distance to centre of sphere)2
(allow any sensible answer) B1
difference:
e.g. gravitational force (always) towards sphere B1
electric force direction depends on sign of charge on sphere / towards or
away from sphere B1
e.g. gravitational field/force is attractive (B1)
electric field/force is attractive or repulsive (B1)
(allow any sensible comparison) [3
(c) gravitational force = 1.67 × 10–27 × 9.81

= 1.6 × 10–26 N A1
electric force = 1.6 × 10–19 × 270 / (1.8 × 10–2) C1
= 2.4 × 10–15 N A1
electric
Page 2 force very much greater than Markgravitational
Scheme force Syllabus B1
Paper [4
A LEVEL – NOVEMBER 2005 9702 4
28 5 4 (a)(a) force½mv on2 proton

= qV is……(ornormal some
to velocity and
verbal field
explanation) …..……………..…… B1 M1
provides
½ × 9.11 × 10-31 ×force
centripetal v2 = (for × 10-19 ×motion)
1.6 circular 1.2 × 104 ………………………… B1 A1 [2
v = 6.49 × 107 m s–1 ………….………………………………………… A0
(b) magnetic force = Bqv B1
(b)(i) centripetal
within field: mrω2 or
force =circular arcmv
2
/r
………………..………………..…………….. B1 B1
v = rω in ‘downward’ direction ……………..………………….. B1 B1
2
Bqvbeyond
= Bqrωfield:
= mrω straight, with no ‘kink’ on leaving field ………………… B1
ω = Bq/m A1 [4
(ii) 1. v is smaller …………………………………………………………………. M1
deflection is larger ………………………………………………………… A1
5 (a) 2. (magnetic)
either force is larger …………………………………………………
φ = BA sinθ M1 M1
deflection is
where A is the arealarger(through
………………………………………………………..
which flux passes) A1
θ is the angle between B and (plane of) A A1
6 (a) or (numerically equal to) force per unit length …………………….…….… M1
φ =on
BA straight conductor carrying unit current ……………………………. A1 (M1)
normal
where A istoarea
the field
normal…………………………………………………………
to B A1 (A1) [2
(b) flux through coil = BA sinθ ……………………………………………….. B1
flux linkage
(b) graph: = BAN
VH constant sinθ
and ………………..…………………………………
non zero between the poles and zero outside B1 M1
sharp increase/decrease at ends of magnet A1 [2
(c) (i) (induced) e.m.f. proportional to ………………………………..…..…..… M1
rate of change of flux (linkage) …………………….……………………. A1
(ii) graph: two square sections in correct positions, zero elsewhere ….. B1
pulses in opposite directions …………………………………… B1
amplitude of second about twice amplitude of first ………….. B1
7 (a) (i) energy required to separate the nucleons in a nucleus ..………..…….. M1

CEDAR COLLEGE nucleons separated© to
Cambridge International Examinations
infinity / completely 2012
…………..……………….. 198
A1
(ii) S shown at peak …..……………………………………………………… B1

A2
IDEAL GASES 
CEDAR COLLEGE 199

CEDAR COLLEGE 200

CEDAR COLLEGE 201
CEDAR COLLEGE 202

3 May/June 2004 , Question #2 , qp_4 For
5
Examiner’s
Use
2 The pressure p of an ideal gas is given by the expression
1 Nm 2
p = <c > .
3 V
(a) Explain the meaning of the symbol <c 2>.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The ideal gas has a density of 2.4 kg m–3 at a pressure of 2.0 105 Pa and a
temperature of 300 K.
(i) Determine the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of the gas atoms at 300 K.
r.m.s. speed = .................................. m s–1 [3]
(ii) Calculate the temperature of the gas for the atoms to have an r.m.s. speed that is
twice that calculated in (i).
temperature = ......................................... K [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 203

4 Oct/Nov , 2002 , Question #4 , qp_4
CEDAR COLLEGE 204

5 For
5 Oct/Nov 2005 , Question #2 , qp_4 Examiner’s
Use
2 The air in a car tyre has a constant volume of 3.1 10–2 m3. The pressure of this air is
2.9 105 Pa at a temperature of 17 °C. The air may be considered to be an ideal gas.
(a) State what is meant by an ideal gas.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Calculate the amount of air, in mol, in the tyre.
amount = ……………………………. mol [2]
(c) The pressure in the tyre is to be increased using a pump. On each stroke of the pump,
0.012 mol of air is forced into the tyre.
Calculate the number of strokes of the pump required to increase the pressure to
3.4 105 Pa at a temperature of 27 °C.
number = ……………………………. [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE
© UCLES 2005 9702/04/O/N/05 205
[Turn over
6
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) The equation
pV = constant T
relates the pressure p and volume V of a gas to its kelvin (thermodynamic)

temperature T.
State two conditions for the equation to be valid.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A gas cylinder contains 4.00 104 cm3 of hydrogen at a pressure of 2.50 107 Pa and a
temperature of 290 K.
The cylinder is to be used to fill balloons. Each balloon, when filled, contains
7.24 103 cm3 of hydrogen at a pressure of 1.85 105 Pa and a temperature of 290 K.
Calculate, assuming that the hydrogen obeys the equation in (a),
(i) the total amount of hydrogen in the cylinder,
amount = ……………………….. mol [3]
(ii) the number of balloons that can be filled from the cylinder.
number = ……………………….. [3]

© UCLES 2006 9702/04/M/J/06
CEDAR COLLEGE 206
7 Oct/Nov 2007 , Question #2 , qp_4 6 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) An amount of 1.00 mol of Helium-4 gas is contained in a cylinder at a pressure of
1.02 × 105 Pa and a temperature of 27 °C.
(i) Calculate the volume of gas in the cylinder.
volume = ............................................ m3 [2]
(ii) Hence show that the average separation of gas atoms in the cylinder is approximately
3.4 × 10–9 m.
[2]
(b) Calculate
(i) the gravitational force between two Helium-4 atoms that are separated by a distance
of 3.4 × 10–9 m,
force = .............................................. N [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 207

© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) the ratio
weight of a Helium-4 atom .
gravitational force between two Helium-4 atoms with separation 3.4 × 10–9 m
ratio = ...................................................[2]
(c) Comment on your answer to (b)(ii) with reference to one of the assumptions of the
kinetic theory of gases.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07 208
[Turn over
2 (a) Explain qualitatively how molecular movement causes the pressure exerted by a gas. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The density of neon gas at a temperature of 273 K and a pressure of 1.02 × 105 Pa is
0.900 kg m–3. Neon may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of neon atoms at
(i) 273 K,
speed = ........................................... m s–1 [3]
(ii) 546 K.
speed = ........................................... m s–1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 209

© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08
7
(c) The calculations in (b) are based on the density for neon being 0.900 kg m–3. For
Suggest the effect, if any, on the root-mean-square speed of changing the density at Examiner’s
constant temperature. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]

CEDAR COLLEGE 210
2 An ideal gas occupies a container of volume 4.5 × 103 cm3 at a pressure of 2.5 × 105 Pa and For
a temperature of 290 K. Examiner’s
Use
(a) Show that the number of atoms of gas in the container is 2.8 × 1023.
[2]
(b) Atoms of a real gas each have a diameter of 1.2 × 10–10 m.
(i) Estimate the volume occupied by 2.8 × 1023 atoms of this gas.
volume = ......................................... m3 [2]
(ii) By reference to your answer in (i), suggest whether the real gas does approximate
to an ideal gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 211

6
2 (a) State what is meant by the internal energy of a gas. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The first law of thermodynamics may be represented by the equation
!U = q + w.
State what is meant by each of the following symbols.
+!U .................................................................................................................................
+q .....................................................................................................................................
+w ....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) An amount of 0.18 mol of an ideal gas is held in an insulated cylinder fitted with a piston,
as shown in Fig. 2.1.
piston
gas
insulated
cylinder
Fig. 2.1
Atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
The volume of the gas is suddenly increased from 1.8 × 103 cm3 to 2.1 × 103 cm3.
For the expansion of the gas,
(i) calculate the work done by the gas and hence show that the internal energy
changes by 30 J,
[3]
© UCLES 2009 9702/42/O/N/09

CEDAR COLLEGE 212
2 (a) Some gas, initially at a temperature of 27.2 °C, is heated so that its temperature rises For
to 38.8 °C. Examiner’s
Calculate, in kelvin, to an appropriate number of decimal places, Use
(i) the initial temperature of the gas,
initial temperature = ............................................. K [2]
(ii) the rise in temperature.
rise in temperature = ............................................ K [1]
(b) The pressure p of an ideal gas is given by the expression
p = 13 ρ!c 2"
where ρ is the density of the gas.
(i) State the meaning of the symbol !c 2".
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use the expression to show that the mean kinetic energy <EK> of the atoms of an
ideal gas is given by the expression
<EK> = 32 kT.
Explain any symbols that you use.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 213

6
(c) Helium-4 may be assumed to behave as an ideal gas. For

A cylinder has a constant volume of 7.8 × 103 cm3 and contains helium-4 gas at a Examiner’s
pressure of 2.1 × 107 Pa and at a temperature of 290 K. Use
Calculate, for the helium gas,
(i) the amount of gas,
amount = ......................................... mol [2]
(ii) the mean kinetic energy of the atoms,
mean kinetic energy = .............................................. J [2]
(iii) the total internal energy.
internal energy = .............................................. J [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

CEDAR COLLEGE 214
2 (a) (i) State the basic assumption of the kinetic theory of gases that leads to the conclusion For
that the potential energy between the atoms of an ideal gas is zero. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the internal energy of a substance.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) Explain why an increase in internal energy of an ideal gas is directly related to a
rise in temperature of the gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A fixed mass of an ideal gas undergoes a cycle PQRP of changes as shown in Fig. 2.1.
10
8 P
volume
/ 10–4 m3
6
2 Q R
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
5
pressure / 10 Pa
Fig. 2.1
CEDAR COLLEGE 215

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10
2 (a) State the basic assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Use equations for the pressure of an ideal gas to deduce that the average translational
kinetic energy <EK> of a molecule of an ideal gas is given by the expression
<EK> = 3 RT
2 NA
where R is the molar gas constant, NA is the Avogadro constant and T is the
thermodynamic temperature of the gas.
[3]
2
(c) A deuterium nucleus 1H and a proton collide. A nuclear reaction occurs, represented by
the equation
2 1 3
1H + 1p 2 He + c.
(i) State and explain whether the reaction represents nuclear fission or nuclear
fusion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 216

© UCLES 2010 9702/43/O/N/10
7
(ii) For the reaction to occur, the minimum total kinetic energy of the deuterium nucleus For
and the proton is 2.4 × 10–14 J. Examiner’s
Assuming that a sample of a mixture of deuterium nuclei and protons behaves as Use
an ideal gas, calculate the temperature of the sample for this reaction to occur.
temperature = ............................................. K [3]
(iii) Suggest why the assumption made in (ii) may not be valid.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 217

2 (a) State what is meant by the Avogadro constant NA. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A balloon is filled with helium gas at a pressure of 1.1 × 105 Pa and a temperature of
25 °C.
The balloon has a volume of 6.5 × 104 cm3.
Helium may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
Determine the number of gas atoms in the balloon.
number = ................................................ [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 218

2 (a) State what is meant by a mole. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two containers A and B are joined by a tube of negligible volume, as illustrated in
Fig. 2.1.
container A container B
3.1 × 103 cm3 4.6 × 103 cm3
17 °C 30 °C
Fig. 2.1
The containers are filled with an ideal gas at a pressure of 2.3 × 105 Pa.
The gas in container A has volume 3.1 × 103 cm3 and is at a temperature of 17 °C.
The gas in container B has volume 4.6 × 103 cm3 and is at a temperature of 30 °C.
Calculate the total amount of gas, in mol, in the containers.
amount = ........................................ mol [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 219

2 (a) One assumption of the kinetic theory of gases is that gas molecules behave as if they For
are hard, elastic identical spheres. Examiner’s
Use
State two other assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Using the kinetic theory of gases, it can be shown that the product of the pressure
p and the volume V of an ideal gas is given by the expression
pV = 13 Nm <c 2>
where m is the mass of a gas molecule.
(i) State the meaning of the symbol
1. N,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. <c 2>.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use the expression to deduce that the mean kinetic energy <EK > of a gas molecule
at temperature T is given by the equation
<EK> = 32 kT
where k is a constant.
[2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 220

© UCLES 2011 9702/42/O/N/11
7
(c) (i) State what is meant by the internal energy of a substance. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Use the equation in (b)(ii) to explain that, for an ideal gas, a change in internal
energy ΔU is given by
ΔU ∝ ΔT
where ΔT is the change in temperature of the gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011
CEDAR COLLEGE
9702/42/O/N/11 [Turn 221
over
2 (a) The kinetic theory of gases is based on some simplifying assumptions. For
The molecules of the gas are assumed to behave as hard elastic identical spheres. Examiner’s
State the assumption about ideal gas molecules based on Use
(i) the nature of their movement,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) their volume.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 222

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/M/J/12
7
(b) A cube of volume V contains N molecules of an ideal gas. Each molecule has a For
component cX of velocity normal to one side S of the cube, as shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
side S
cx
Fig. 2.1
The pressure p of the gas due to the component cX of velocity is given by the expression
pV = NmcX2
where m is the mass of a molecule.
Explain how the expression leads to the relation
pV = 13 Nm<c 2>
where <c 2> is the mean square speed of the molecules.
[3]
(c) The molecules of an ideal gas have a root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of 520 m s–1 at a
temperature of 27 °C.
Calculate the r.m.s. speed of the molecules at a temperature of 100 °C.
r.m.s. speed = ....................................... m s–1 [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE 223

2 A student suggests that, when an ideal gas is heated from 100 °C to 200 °C, the internal For
energy of the gas is doubled. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) State what is meant by internal energy.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) By reference to one of the assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases and your
answer in (i), deduce what is meant by the internal energy of an ideal gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) State and explain whether the student’s suggestion is correct.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 224

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/O/N/12
4
Section A For
Examiner’s
1 An ideal gas has volume V and pressure p. For this gas, the product pV is given by the
expression
pV = 13 Nm <c 2>
where m is the mass of a molecule of the gas.
(a) State the meaning of the symbol
(i) N,
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) <c 2>.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A gas cylinder of volume 2.1 × 104 cm3 contains helium-4 gas at pressure 6.1 × 105 Pa
and temperature 12 °C. Helium-4 may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
(i) Determine, for the helium gas,
1. the amount, in mol,
amount = ......................................... mol [3]
2. the number of atoms.
number = .................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2012 9702/43/O/N/12
CEDAR COLLEGE 225

5
(ii) Calculate the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of the helium atoms. For
Examiner’s
Use
r.m.s. speed = ....................................... m s–1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 226

2 (a) State what is meant by an ideal gas. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Two cylinders A and B are connected by a tube of negligible volume, as shown in
Fig. 2.1.
cylinder A
cylinder B
tap T
2.5 × 103 cm3
3.4 × 105 Pa 1.6 × 103 cm3
300 K 4.9 × 105 Pa
tube
Fig. 2.1
Initially, tap T is closed. The cylinders contain an ideal gas at different pressures.
(i) Cylinder A has a constant volume of 2.5 × 103 cm3 and contains gas at pressure
3.4 × 105 Pa and temperature 300 K.
Show that cylinder A contains 0.34 mol of gas.
[1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 227

© UCLES 2013 9702/41/M/J/13
7
(ii) Cylinder B has a constant volume of 1.6 × 103 cm3 and contains 0.20 mol of gas. For
When tap T is opened, the pressure of the gas in both cylinders is 3.9 × 105 Pa. Examiner’s
No thermal energy enters or leaves the gas. Use
Determine the final temperature of the gas.
temperature = .............................................. K [2]
(c) By reference to work done and change in internal energy, suggest why the temperature
of the gas in cylinder A has changed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE 228
2 (a) The volume of an ideal gas in a cylinder is 1.80 × 10–3 m3 at a pressure of 2.60 × 105 Pa For
and a temperature of 297 K, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
ideal gas
1.80 × 10–3 m3
2.60 × 105 Pa
297 K
Fig. 2.1
The thermal energy required to raise the temperature by 1.00 K of 1.00 mol of the gas at
constant volume is 12.5 J.
The gas is heated at constant volume such that the internal energy of the gas increases
by 95.0 J.
(i) Calculate
1. the amount of gas, in mol, in the cylinder,
amount = ........................................... mol [2]
2. the rise in temperature of the gas.
temperature rise = .............................................. K [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 229

6
(ii) Use your answer in (i) part 2 to show that the final pressure of the gas in the For
cylinder is 2.95 × 105 Pa. Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(b) The gas is now allowed to expand. No thermal energy enters or leaves the gas.
The gas does 120 J of work when expanding against the external pressure.
State and explain whether the final temperature of the gas is above or below 297 K.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

CEDAR COLLEGE 230
2 (a) (i) State what is meant by the internal energy of a system. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Explain why, for an ideal gas, the internal energy is equal to the total kinetic energy
of the molecules of the gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The mean kinetic energy <EK> of a molecule of an ideal gas is given by the expression
<EK> = 32 kT
where k is the Boltzmann constant and T is the thermodynamic temperature of the gas.
A cylinder contains 1.0 mol of an ideal gas. The gas is heated so that its temperature
changes from 280 K to 460 K.
(i) Calculate the change in total kinetic energy of the gas molecules.
change in energy = ............................................. J [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 231

© UCLES 2013 9702/43/O/N/13
2 (a) Explain what is meant by the Avogadro constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Argon-40 ( 40
18Ar) may be assumed to be an ideal gas.
A mass of 3.2 g of argon-40 has a volume of 210 cm3 at a temperature of 37 °C.
Determine, for this mass of argon-40 gas,
(i) the amount, in mol,
amount = ................................................. mol [1]
(ii) the pressure,
pressure = ................................................... Pa [2]
(iii) the root-mean-square (r.m.s.) speed of an argon atom.
r.m.s. speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 232

2 A constant mass of an ideal gas has a volume of 3.49 × 103 cm3 at a temperature of 21.0 °C.
When the gas is heated, 565 J of thermal energy causes it to expand to a volume of 3.87 × 103 cm3
at 53.0 °C. This is illustrated in Fig. 2.1.
3.49 × 103 cm3 3.87 × 103 cm3

565 J
21.0 °C 53.0 °C
Fig. 2.1
(a) Show that the initial and final pressures of the gas are equal.
[2]
(b) The pressure of the gas is 4.20 × 105 Pa.
For this heating of the gas,
(i) calculate the work done by the gas,
work done = ..................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 233

7
(ii) use the first law of thermodynamics and your answer in (i) to determine the change in
internal energy of the gas.
change in internal energy = ..................................................... J [2]
(c) Explain why the change in kinetic energy of the molecules of this ideal gas is equal to the
change in internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 234

3 A fixed mass of gas has an initial volume of 5.00 × 10−4 m3 at a pressure of 2.40 × 105 Pa and a
temperature of 288 K. It is heated at constant pressure so that, in its final state, the volume is
14.5 × 10−4 m3 at a temperature of 835 K, as illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
initial state final state
5.00 × 10–4 m3 14.5 × 10–4 m3

2.40 × 105 Pa 2.40 × 105 Pa
288 K 835 K
Fig. 3.1
(a) Show that these two states provide evidence that the gas behaves as an ideal gas.
[3]
(b) The total thermal energy supplied to the gas for this change is 569 J.
Determine
(i) the external work done,
work done = ..................................................... J [2]
© UCLES 2014 9702/43/O/N/14
CEDAR COLLEGE 235

11
(ii) the change in internal energy of the gas. State whether the change is an increase or a
decrease in internal energy.
change in internal energy = ........................................................... J
........................................................................................................ [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 236

2 (a) State what is meant by internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The variation with volume V of the pressure p of an ideal gas as it undergoes a cycle ABCA of
changes is shown in Fig. 2.1.
4.0
p / 105 Pa
B
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
A C
1.0
3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
V / 10 m3
Fig. 2.1
The temperature of the gas at A is 290 K. The temperature at B is 870 K.
© UCLES 2015 9702/41/M/J/15
CEDAR COLLEGE 237

7
Determine
(i) the amount, in mol, of gas,
amount = .................................................. mol [2]
(ii) the temperature of the gas at C.
temperature = ..................................................... K [2]
(c) Explain why the change from C to A involves external work and a change in internal energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 238

2 In a sample of gas at room temperature, five atoms have the following speeds:
1.32 × 103 m s–1

1.50 × 103 m s–1
1.46 × 103 m s–1
1.28 × 103 m s–1
1.64 × 103 m s–1.
For these five atoms, calculate, to three significant figures,
(a) the mean speed,
mean speed = ................................................. m s–1 [1]
(b) the mean-square speed,
mean-square speed = ................................................ m2 s–2 [2]
(c) the root-mean-square speed.
root-mean-square speed = ................................................. m s–1 [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 239

mass ....................................................................................... B1
acceleration = 9.77 m s-2 .............................................................. B1 [2]
2 (a) (i) a,ω and x identified ………(-1 each error or omission) ................. B2
(ii) (-)ve because a and x in opposite directions

ANSWERS
OR a directed towards mean position/centre................................ B1 [3]
(b) (i) forces in springs are k(e + x) and k(e – x) .................................... C1

1 resultant = k(e + x) – k(e – x) ......................................................M1
= 2kx ............................................................................ A0 [2]
(ii) F = ma ....................................................................................... B1
a = -2kx/m .................................................................................... A0
(-)ve sign explained...................................................................... B1 [2]
(iii) ω2 = 2k/m ..................................................................................... C1

(2πf)2 = (2 x 120)/0.90 .................................................................. C1
f = 2.6 Hz ..................................................................................... A1 [3]
(c) atom held in position by attractive forces

atom oscillates,
not just two forces OR 3D not 1D
force not proportional to x
any two relevant points, 1 each, max 2 ........................................ B2 [2]
23 (a) pV/T = constant............................................................................ C1
T = (6.5 x 106 x 30 x 300)/(1.1 x 105 x 540)................................. C1
= 985 K .................................................................................... A1 [3]
(if uses °C, allow 1/3 marks for clear formula)
3 (b) (i) ∆U = q + w
symbols identified correctly ..........................................................M1
directions correct.......................................................................... A1 [2]
(ii)2
Page q is zero .......................................................................................
Mark Scheme Syllabus B1 Paper
w is positive
A/ASOR ∆U =EXAMINATIONS
LEVEL w and U increases - JUNE....................................
2004 9702B1 04
∆U is rise in kinetic energy of atoms ............................................M1
and mean kinetic energy ∝ T ....................................................... A1 [4]
1 (a) charge is quantised/enabled
(allow one of the last two marks electron charge
if states to be measured
‘U increases so T rises’) B1 [1]
(b) all are (approximately) n x (1.6 x 10-19 C) M1

so e = 1.6 x 10-19 C (allow 2 sig. fig. only A1 [2]
© University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate 2003
summing charges and dividing ten, without explanation scores 1/2
Total [3]
3
2 (a) mean (value of the) square M1
of the speeds (velocities) of the atoms/particles/molecules A1 [2]
(b) (i) 1 C1
p= ρ < c2 >
3
<c2> = 3 x 2 x 105/2.4 = 2.5 x 105 C1
r.m.s speed = 500 ms-1 A1 [3]
(ii) new <c2> = 1.0 x 106 or <c2> increases by factor of 4 C1
<c2> ∝ T or 3/2 kT = 1/2 m<c2> C1
T = {(1.0 x 106) / (2.5 x 105)} x 300
= 1200 K A1 [3]
Total [8]
3 (a) (i) (force) = GM1M2/(R1 + R2)2 B1
(ii) (force) = M1R1 ω 2 or M2R2 ω 2 B1 [2]
(b) ω = 2π/(1.26 x 108) or 2π/T C1

-8 -1
= 4.99 x 10 rad s A1 [2]
allow 2 s.f.: 1.59π x 10-8 scores 1/2
CEDAR COLLEGE 240
(c) (i) reference to either taking moments (about C) or same (centripetal)
force B1
M1R1 = M2R2 or M1R1 ω 2 = M2R2 ω 2 B1
1 (a) GM / R2 = Rω2 …………….…………………...…..………………….. C1
ω = 2π / (24 × 3600) ………………………………..……..…………… C1
6.67 × 10–11 × 6.0 × 1024 = R3 × ω2
R3 = 7.57 × 1022 ………………………………………………………… M1
4
R = 4.23 × 107 m ……………………………………………………….. A0 [3]
(b)(i) ∆Φ = GM/Re – GM/Ro …...………………………………………….….. C1

Page 1 = (6.67 × 10–11 × 6.0 ×Mark1024)Scheme
( 1 / 6.4 × 106 – 1 / 4.2 × 107) Syllabus Paper
7 –1
= 5.31 × 10GCE J kgA/AS ………………………………………………….
Level – May/June 2006 9702 C1 04
∆EP = 5.31 × 107 × 650 …………………………………………………. C1
10
1 (a) centripetal = 3.45 × 10
force J ……………………………………………………..
is provided by gravitational force A1 B1 [4]
2 2
mv / r = GMm / r B1
(c) e.g. satellite will already have some speed in the correct direction … B1 [1]
hence v = √(GM / r) A0 [2]
25 (a) obeys the law2 pV = constant × T ………………………..……………….. M1
(b) (i) at E
allK (= ½mvof) =
values V and/ T2r ……………………………………………….
p,GMm A1 B1 [1] [2]
(b) (ii)n E=P =(2.9 × 105/ ×r 3.1 × 10–2) / (8.31 × 290) …..………………..………...
- GMm C1 B1 [1]
= 3.73 mol ………………………………………………………………. A1 [2]
(iii) ET = - GMm / r + GMm / 2r C1
= - GMm / 2r. 3 .4 290 A1 [2]
(c) at new pressure, n n = 3.73 × ×
2 .9 300
(c) (i) if ET decreases then=-4.23
GMmmol / 2r ….……………………………………….
becomes more negative C1
or GMm
change / 2r becomes
= 0.50 larger
mol ……………………………………………………….… C1 M1
so r decreases
number of strokes = 0.50 / 0.012 = 42 (must round up for mark) ……. A1 A1 [2] [3]
3 (a) (ii)correct statement,

EK = GMm words
/ 2r and or symbols …..…………………………...…..
r decreases B1 M1 [1]
so (EK and) v increases A1 [2]
(b)(i) w = p∆V ………………………………………………………………….. C1
5
62 = 1.03
(a) e.g. fixed mass/× 10 × (2.96
amount × 10–2 – 1.87 × 10–5)
of gas
= (–) 3050 J …………………..……………….…………..……………
ideal gas A1 [2]
(any two, 1 each) 4 B2 [2]
(ii) q = 4.05 × 10 J …………………………………………………………. B1 [1]
(b) (i) n = pV / RT 4 C1
(iii) ∆U = =4.05
(2.5××10107 –×3050
4.00 =× 37500 J -6 )…no
104 x 10 e.c.f.
/ (8.31 from (a)…………………
× 290) A1 C1 [1]
penalise 2 sig.fig.
= 415 mol once only A1 [3]
(c) number of molecules = NA ……………………………………………….
5 7 C1
(ii)energy
volume=of gas at
37500 1.85 ×× 10
/ (6.02 1023Pa) = (2.5 × 10 6 × 4.00 × 104 ) / (1.85 × 105 )
3
= 6.2 ×6 10–20 J (accept = 5.41 × 10
1 sig.fig.) cm
…………………………..…. A1 C1 [2]
4 3
so, 5.41 × 10 = 4.00 × 10 + 7.24 × 10 N C1
4 (a) (i) ω N = = 2πf
741 ………………………………………………………....………….. C1 A1 [3]
(answer 1400or fails to allow for gas in cylinder, max 2/3 )
= 2π × 740
= 8800 rad s–1 ………………………………………………………….. A1 [2]
3 (a) gradient of graph is (a measure of) the sensitivity M1
2
(ii)thea0gradient
= (–)ωvaries with temperature
x0 ……………………………..………………………………… C1 A1 [2]
= (8800) × 0.080 × 10–3
2
(b) 2040 ±=20 6200 m s–2 …………………….…………………………………….

Ω corresponds to 15.0 ± 0.2 °C A1 C1 [2]
T / K = T / °C + 273.15 (allow 273.2) C1
(b) temperature
straight lineisthrough
288.2 Korigin with negative gradient …….…………….... M1 A1 [3]
end points of line correctly labelled …………………………………….. A1 [2]
4 (a) (i) 1.0 B1 [1]
(c) (i) zero displacement ………………………………………………………… B1 [1]
(ii) 40 Hz B1 [1]
(ii) v = ωx0 ……………………………………………………………………. C1
(b) (i) speed = 8800= 2π 0.080 × 10–3
×fa C1
= 0.70 m s–1 ……………………………………………………………. A1 [2]
= 2π × 40 × 42 × 10-3
= 10.6 m s-1 A1 [2]
(ii) acceleration = 4π2 f2 a C1
= (80π)2 × 42 × 10-3
CEDAR COLLEGE
= 2650 m s-2 241
A1 [2]
(c) (i) S marked correctly (on ‘horizontal line through centre of wheel) B1
(L – 13) × 5/1.8 = 5.0 + 5/9.8 × L × 10-2 × 8.72 .................................................. C1
L = 17.2 cm ........................................................................................................... A1 [4]
(constant centripetal force of 5.0 N gives L = 16.6 cm allow 2/4)
72 (a)
Page(i)2 pV = nRT Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
V = (8.31 × 300)/(1.02
GCE A/AS 105) ...............................................................................
× LEVEL – May/June 2008 9702 C1 04
= 0.0244 m3 (if uses Celsius, then 0/2) .......................................................... A1 [2]
Section A
(ii) volume occupied by one atom = 0.0244 / (6.02 × 1023) = 4.06 × 10-26 m3 ............ M1
1 separation
(a) (i) angle ≈ 3√(4.06
(subtended) 10-26) of
at×centre ................................................................................
circle A1 B1
-9
= 3.44 × 10 m ...................................................................................
by an arc equal in length to the radius (of the circle) A0 B1[2] [2]
(ii) angle swept out per unit time / rate of change of angle M1
(b) (i) F = GMm / r2 ....................................................................................................... C1
by the string -11 A1 [2]
= (6.67 × 10 × {4 × 1.66 × 10-27}2) / (3.44 × 10-9)2 .......................................... C1
= 2.49 × 10-46 N ................................................................................................ A1 [3]
(b) friction provides / equals the centripetal force B1
(ii) ratio = (4 ×2 1.66 × 10-27 × 9.8) / 2.49 × 10-46 ........................................................ C1
0.72 W = mdω20 C1
= 2.6 × 10 .......................................................................................................... A1 [2]
0.72 mg = m × 0.35ω2
–1
ω = 4.49 (rad s ) C1
n = (ω /2π)
(c) assumption that× 60forces between atoms are negligible ................................................. B1 B1
–1
= 43 min (allow
comment e.g. ratio shows42) gravitational force to be very small A1 [5]
e.g. force is very much less than weight
e.g. if there are forces, they are not gravitational ....................................... B1 [2]
(c) either centripetal force increases as r increases
or centripetal force larger at edge M1
so flies off at edge first A1 [2]
(F = mrω2 so edge first – treat as special case and allow one mark)
8
2 (a) molecule(s) rebound from wall of vessel / hits walls B1
change in momentum gives rise to impulse / force B1
either (many impulses) averaged to give constant force / pressure
or the molecules are in random motion B1 [3]
(b) (i) p = !
"
ρ<c2> C1
© UCLES 2007
1.02 × 105 = "

!
× 0.900 × <c2>
<c2> = 3.4 × 105 C1

cRMS = 580 m s–1 A1 [3]
(ii) either <c2> ∝ T or <c2> = 2 × 3.4 ×105 C1

cRMS = 830 m s–1 (allow 820) A1 [2]
(c) cRMS depends on temperature (alone) B1

so no effect B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 242
© UCLES 2008
x = 7.6 × 10
1 x = 4.2
(a) (i) force 107 m
per×(unit) .................................................................................................
mass ……(ratio idea essential) ................................................. B1 A1 [3]
[1]
(use of g = 10 m s-2, loses 1 mark but once only in the Paper)
(ii) g = GM / R2 ....................................................................................................... C1
9.81 = (6.67 × 10-11 × M) / (6.38 × 106 )2 ……(all 3 s.f) ......................................M1 [Total: 11]
24
M = 5.99 × 10 kg ........................................................................................... A0 [2]
9
2 (a) either pV = NkT or pV = nRT and n = N / NA ..................................................... C1
clear correct substitution e.g. 2
(b) (i) either
5 GM = ω3 2r3 or -6 gR = ω2r3 ..................................................................
-23 C1
2.5 × 10 × 4.5 × 10 -11 × 10 = N × 1.38 24 × 10
2 × 290 ...............................................M1
7 3
either 6.67 × 10 x 5.99 × 10 = ω × (2.86 × 10 )
N = 2.8 × 1023 .......................................................................................................... A0 [2]
or 9.81 × (6.38 × 106 )2 = ω2 × (2.86 × 107 )3 ............................................... C1
(allow 1 mark for calculation
-4 -1 of n = 0.467 mol)
ω = 1.3 × 10 rad s ......................................................................................... A1 [3]
(use of r = 2.22 × 107m scores max 2 marks)
(b) (ii)
(i) period
volumeof =orbit
(1.2=× 2π 10-10/ω 2.8 × 1023 or 4 πr3 × 2.8 × 1023 ..............................C1
)3 ×....................................................................................... C1
4
3
= 4.8=× 10 4.8-7×m10 3 s (= 13.4 hours) 2.53 .......................................................
× 10-7 m3 4 ..................................... A1 A1 [2]
period for geostationary satellite is 24 hours (= 8.6 × 10 s) ............................. A1
(ii) so no 4.5
either ...................................................................................................................
× 103 cm3 >> 0.48 cm3 or ratio of volumes is about 10-4 ................A0 B1 [3]
justified because volume of molecules is negligible ........................................... B1 [2]
(c) satellite can then provide cover at Poles ...................................................................[Total:
B1 [1] 6]
[Total: 10]
10
2 (a) sum of kinetic and potential energies of molecules / particles / atoms ......................M1
random (distribution) ................................................................................................. A1 [2]
(b) +∆U: increase in internal energy ............................................................................... B1

+q: heating of / heat supplied to system ................................................................. B1
+w: work done on system ....................................................................................... B1 [3]
(c) (i) work done = p∆V .............................................................................................. C1

= 1.0 × 105 × (2.1 – 1.8) × 10-3
© UCLES 2009
= 30 J ..............................................................................................M1
w = 30 J, q = 0 so ∆U = 30 J .............................................................................. A1 [3]
(ii) these three marks were removed, as insufficient data was given in the question.
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
CEDAR COLLEGE 243

centripetal force = mrω2 C1
15 = 3.0/9.8 × 0.85 × ω2 C1
ω = 7.6 rad s–1 A1 [4]
11
2 (a) (i) 27.2 + 273.15 or 27.2 + 273.2 C1
300.4 K A1 [2]
(ii) 11.6 K GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2010 9702 A1
41 [1]
Section A
(b) (i) (<c2> is the) mean / average square speed B1 [1]
1 (a) force per unit mass (ratio idea essential) B1 [1]
(ii) ρ = Nm/V with N explained B1
so, pV = 1/3 Nm<c2> B1
and pV
(b) graph: = NkT
correct with k explained
curvature B1
M1
2
so mean
fromkinetic
(R,1.0energy <EK> one
gS) & at/ least = ½m<c
other > = 3/2point
correct kT B1
A1 [4]
[2]
(c)
(c) (i)
(i) pV = nRT
fields of Earth and Moon are in opposite directions M1
7 –3
2.1
either × 7.8 × 10
× 10resultant = n × by
field found × 290
8.3subtraction of the field strength C1
nor= 68 any
mol other sensible comment A1
A1 [2]
so there is a point where it is zero A0 [2]
(ii) mean
(allowkinetic
FE = –F energy = 3/2 kT
M for 2 marks)
= 3/2 × 1.38 × 10–23 × 290 C1
(ii) GME / x2 = GMM / (D –=x)6.0 2
× 10–21 J C1
A1 [2]
(6.0 × 10 ) / (7.4 × 10 ) = x2 / (60RE – x)2
24 22
C1
x = 54 RE that total internal energy is the total kinetic energy
(iii) realisation A1
C1 [3]
energy = 6.0 × 10–21 × 68 × 6.02 × 1023 C1
(iii) =graph: = 05 Jat least ⅔ distance to Moon
2.46 ×g 10 B1
A1 [3]
gE and gM in opposite directions M1
correct curvature (by eye) and gE > gM at surface A1 [3]
3 (a) (i) to-and-fro / backward and forward motion (between two limits) B1 [1]
12
2 (a) (ii)
(i) no
noenergy
forces (of
lossattraction
or gain / or
norepulsion) between
external force atoms
acting / molecules
/ constant / particles
energy B1 [1]
/ constant amplitude
B1 [1]
(ii) sum of kinetic and potential energy of atoms / molecules M1
due to random
(iii) acceleration motion
directed towards a fixed point A1 [2]
B1
acceleration proportional to distance from the fixed point / displacement B1 [2]
(iii) (random) kinetic energy increases with temperature M1
no potential energy
(so increase
(b) acceleration in temperature
is constant increases internal energy)
(magnitude) A1 [2]
M1
so cannot be s.h.m. A1 [2]
(b) (i) zero A1 [1]
(ii) work done = p∆V C1

= 4.0 × 105 × 6 × 10 –4
© UCLES 2010
= 240 J (ignore any sign) A1 [2]
(iii)
change work done / J heating / J increase in internal
energy / J
P→Q +240 –600 –360

Q→R 0 +720 +720
R→P –840 +480 –360
(correct signs essential)

(each horizontal line correct, 1 mark – max 3 ) B3 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 244
T = 165 years A1 [2]
(ii) speed = (2π × 1.08 × 108) / (0.615 × 365 × 24 × 3600) C1

= 35 km s–1 A1 [2]
13
2 (a) atoms / molecules / particles behave as elastic (identical) spheres (1)
volume of atoms / molecules negligible compared to volume of containing vessel (1)
time of collision negligible to time between collisions (1)
no forces of attraction or repulsion between atoms / molecules (1)
atoms / molecules / particles are in (continuous) random motion (1)
(any four, 1 each) B4 [4]
(b) pV = 1
3
Nm<c2> and pV = nRT or pV = NkT B1
1
3
Nm<c2> = nRT or = NkT and <EK> = ½m<c2> B1
n = N/NA or k = R/NA B1
3
<EK> = × R/NA × T A0 [3]
2

(c) (i) reaction represents either build-up of nucleus
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2011 from light nuclei
9702 41
or build-up of heavy nucleus from nuclei M1
Section A so fusion reaction A1 [2]
1 (a) (ii) protonproportional

(i) force and deuterium nucleus
to product ofwill have equal kinetic energies
masses B1 B1
–14 3 23
force 10 = 2 proportional
1.2 × inversely × 8.31 / (6.02
to ×square
10 ) ×ofTseparation B1 C1 [2]
8
T = 5.8 × 10 K A1 [3]
(ii) separation 2.4 × greater
(use of E =much 10–14 giving
than 1.16
radius
× 10 9
/ diameter of 1
K scores Sun / planet
mark) B1 [1]
(iii) either inter-molecular / atomic / nuclear forces exist

(b) (i) e.g.
or force or field
proton andstrength /r2
∝ 1nucleus
deuterium are positively charged / repel B1 [1]
potential ∝ 1 / r B1 [1]
(ii) e.g. gravitational force (always) attractive B1

electric force attractive or repulsive B1 [2]
14
2 (a) number of atoms of carbon-12 M1
in 0.012 kg of carbon-12 © UCLES 2010 A1 [2]
(b) pV = NkT or pV = nRT C1

either 1.1 × 105 × 6.5 × 10–2 = N × 1.38 × 10–23 × 298
or 1.1 × 105 × 6.5 × 10–2 = n × 8.31 × 298 and n = N / 6.02 × 1023 C1
N = 1.7 × 1024 A1 [4]
3 (a) acceleration / force proportional to displacement from a fixed point M1

direction to displacement A1 [2]

direction to displacement B1 [2]
(ii) ω 2 = (Aρg / m) C1
ω = 2πf C1
(2 × π × 1.5)2 = ({4.5 × 10–4 × 1.0 × 103 × 9.81} / m) C1
CEDAR COLLEGEm = 50 g 245
A1 [4]
4 (a) work done in bringing unit positive charge M1

GMm/r = mrω (must be in terms of ω) B1
or3 2 FE = 2.30 × 10–28 × R –2 (C1)
r ω = GM and GM is a constant B1 [3]
FG = 1.86 × 10–64 × R –2 (C1)
FE / FG = 1.2 × 1036 (A1)
(b) (i) 1. for Phobos, ω = 2π/(7.65 × 3600) C1
15 = 2.28 × 10–4 rad s–1
2 (a) amount of substance M1
(9.39 × 10 ) × (2.28 × 10–4)2 = 6.67 × 10–11 × M
6 3
C1
containing same number23of particles as in 0.012 kg of carbon-12 A1 [2]
M = 6.46 × 10 kg A1 [3]
2. (9.39 × 106)3 × (2.28 × 10–4)2 = (1.99 × 107)3 × ω2 C1

(b) pV = nRT –5 –1 C1
amount = ω(2.3= 7.30
× 105××10 3.1 rad
× 10s–3) / (8.31 × 290) C1
–5
+ (2.3 × 10 = 4.6
T5 × 2π/ω
× 10= –32π/(7.30
) / (8.31 ×
× 10
303) ) C1
= 8.6 × 104 s
= 0.296 + 0.420 C1
= 0.716 mol = 23.6 hours A1 A1 [3]
[4]
(give full credit for starting equation pV = NkT and N = nNA)
(ii) either almost ‘geostationary’
or satellite would take a long time to cross the sky B1 [1]
3 (a) charges on plates are equal and opposite M1
162 so no resultant charge
e.g. moving
A1
(a) energy storedinbecause
random there
(rapid)ismotion
chargeofseparation
molecules/atoms/particles B1 [3]
volume of molecules/atoms/particles negligible compared to volume of
container = Q / V
(b) (i) capacitance C1
time of collision negligible
= (18 × 10–3) / to
10time between collisions
(1 each, max 2) = 1800 µF A1 B2 [2]
[2]
(ii) use of area under graph or energy = ½CV2 C1

(b) (i) 1. number of (gas) molecules B1 [1]
energy = 2.5 × 15.7 × 10 or energy = ½ × 1800 × 10–6 × (102 – 7.52)
–3
= 39 mJ A1 [2]
2. mean square speed/velocity (of gas molecules) B1 [1]
(ii) either pV = NkT or pV = nRT and links n and k

(c) combined capacitance of2 Y & Z = 20 µF or total capacitance = 6.67 µF C1
and <EK> = ½m<c > M1
p.d. across capacitor X = 8 V or p.d. across combination = 12 V C1
–6 3
charge = 10 × 10 × 8 6.67
or to
clear algebra leading 10=–6 × kT
<E×K> 12 A1 [2]
= 80 µC 2 A1 [3]
(c) (i) sum of potential energy and kinetic energy of molecules/atoms/particles M1

(ii) no intermolecular forces so no potential energy B1

(change in) internal energy is (change in) kinetic energy and this is
© University
proportional to (changeof in
Cambridge
)T International Examinations 2011 B1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 246

v = 2 × GM/r C1
= (2 × 4.3 × 1013) / (3.4 × 106) C1
v = 5.0 × 103 m s–1 A1 [3]
(Use of diameter instead of radius to give v = 3.6 × 103 m s–1 scores 2 marks)
172 (a) (i) either random motion

Page 2 or constant velocityMark
untilScheme
hits wall/other molecule Syllabus B1Paper [1]
(ii) (total) volume of molecules is negligible M1
compared to volume of containing Section
vesselA A1
or
1 (a) force radius/diameter
is proportional toofthe product ofisthe
a molecule masses and
negligible (M1)
inversely proportional to the square of
compared to the average intermolecularthe separation
distance (A1) M1 [2]
(b) either molecule has component of velocity in three directions

2
c2 = cXforce
(b) (i)or gravitational 2
2
2
+ cprovides
Y + cZ
2 the centripetal force
2
M1 B1
mv /rmotion
random = GMm/r andand EK = ½mv
averaging, so <cX2 > = <cY2 > = <cZ2 > M1 M1
<c2 hence
> = 3<c 2 GMm/2r
EKX= > A1 A0 [2]
so, pV = ⅓Nm<c2 > A0 [3]
(ii) 1. ∆EK = ½ × 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1) C1
(allow 1.0 × 108 J if evidence that EK evaluated separately for each r)
(c) <c2 > ∝ T or crms ∝ ! C1
temperatures are 300
2. ∆EP = 4.00 K14and
× 10 373×K({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1)
× 620 C1 C1
–1
crms = 580 m = s1.85 × 108 J (ignore any sign in answer) A1 A1 [3]
[2]
(Do not(allow
allow any
1.8 ormarks
1.9 ×for
10use
8
J) of temperature in units of ºC instead of K)

18
2 © University
(a) (i) sum of potential energy of Cambridge
and International
kinetic energy Examinations
of atoms 2012
/ molecules / particles M1
reference to random A1 [2]
(ii) no intermolecular forces B1

no potential energy B1
internal energy is kinetic energy (of random motion) of molecules B1 [3]

or temperature in kelvin is not doubled B1 [2]
3 (a) temperature of the spheres is the same B1

(b) (i) power = m × c × ∆θ where m is mass per second C1

3800 = m × 4.2 × (42 – 18) C1
m = 38 g s–1 A1 [3]
(ii) some thermal energy is lost to the surroundings M1

4 (a) straight line through origin M1

shows acceleration proportional to displacement A1
negative gradient M1
shows acceleration and displacement in opposite directions A1 [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 247
Section A
19 Page
1 (a) (i)2 number of molecules Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
B1 [1]
(ii) mean square speed B1 [1]
Section A
1 (b) region
(a) (i) 1. ofpV
space
= nRTarea / volume B1
C1
where a mass experiences
n = (6.1 × 105 × 2.1a×force
104 × 10–6 ) / (8.31 × 285) B1
C1 [2]
n = 5.4 mol A1 [3]
(b) (i) force proportional
2. either N = nNAto product of two masses M1
force=inversely
5.4 × 6.02 proportional
× 1023 to the square of their separation M1
C1
either reference
= 3.26 × 10 to
24 point masses or separation >> ‘size’ of masses A1
A1 [3]
or
2
(ii) field pV = NkT = GM / x or field strength ∝!"!#!x!
strength C1
ratioN= =(7.78 1085)2× /2.1
(6.1 ×× 10 (1.5× ×10
4 8 2 –6
10×
–23
) 10 ) / (1.38 × 10 × 285) (C1)
C1
24
N= =273.26 × 10 (A1)
A1 [2]
[3]
(ii) either 6.1 × 105 × 2.1 × 10–2 = 1 /3 × 3.25 × 1024 × 4 × 1.66 × 10–27 × <c2> C1
<c2> = centripetal
(c) (i) either 1.78 × 106 force = mRω2 and ω = 2π / T C1
cRMS = 1.33
or × 103 m
centripetal s–1 = mv2 / R and v = 2πR /T
force A1
B1
or
gravitational force –27
provides the3 centripetal force B1
1 2
/2 × 4GMm
either × 1.66/ R
× 210
= × <c
mRω 2 > = /2 × 1.38
or GMm / R2 =× mv10–23
2
/R× 285 (C1)
M1
2 6
<c=>4π
M = 21.78 × 10
R3 / GT 2 (C1)
A0 [3]
3 –1
c RMS = 1.33 × 10 m s (A1) [3]
(allow working to be given in terms of acceleration)
(ii) M = {4π2 × (1.5 × 1011)3} / {6.67 × 10–11 × (3.16 × 107)2} C1

2 (a) (i) 1. 0.1 s, 0.3 s,300.5 s, etc (any two) A1 [1]
= 2.0 × 10 kg A1 [2]
2. either 0, 0.4 s, 0.8 s, 1.2 s
20 or
2 (a) obeys the0.2equation 1.0=s constant
s, 0.6 s,pV (any two)× T or pV = nRT M1
A1 [1]
p, V and T explained A1
at allperiod
(ii) values=of0.4
p,sV and T/fixed mass/n is constant A1
C1 [3]
frequency = (1/0.4 =) 2.5 Hz A1 [2]
5 3 –6
(i) 3.4
(b) (iii) × 10
phase × 2.5 × 10
difference = 90×°10
or ½=πnrad
× 8.31 × 300 M1
B1 [1]
n = 0.34 mol A0 [1]
(b) (ii) for total

frequency = 5mass/amount
2.4 – 2.5 Hz of gas B1 [1]
3.9 × 10 × (2.5 + 1.6) × 103 × 10–6 = (0.34 + 0.20) × 8.31 × T C1
T = 360 K A1 [2]
(c) e.g. attach sheet of card to trolley M1
increases damping / frictional force A1
(c) when tap opened
e.g. reduce oscillator amplitude (M1)
gas passed (from cylinder
reduces power/energy B)to
input tosystem
cylinder A B1
(A1) [2]
work done on gas in cylinder A (and no heating) M1
so internal energy and hence temperature increase A1 [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE 248

= 7.57 × 1022 C1
R = 4.2 × 107 m A1 [3]
(missing out 3600 gives 1.8 × 105 m and scores 2/3 marks)
212 (a) (i) 1. pV = nRT
1.80 × 10–3 × 2.60 × 105Section
= n × A8.31 × 297 C1
n = 0.19 mol A1 [2]
1 (a) force proportional to product of the two masses and inversely proportional to the
square of their separation M1
2. ∆q = mc∆T
either reference to point masses or separation >> ‘size’ of masses A1 [2]
95.0 = 0.190 × 12.5 × ∆T B1
∆T = 40 K A1 [2]
(allow
(b) gravitational force 2 marks for the
provides correct answerforce
centripetal with clear logic shown) B1
2 2
GMm / R = mRω M1
(ii) p/T
where m =isconstant
the5 mass of the planet A1
(2.6
GM = R ω 3 ×2 10 ) / 297 = p / (297 + 40) M1
A0 [3]
p = 2.95 × 105 Pa A0 [1]
(c) ω = 2π / T C1
changeMin
(b) either internal energy is 120 3 J / 25 J 2 B1
star / M Sun = (R star / R Sun ) × (T Sun / T star)
internalMenergy 3 2
decreases / ∆U is 30
negative / kinetic energy of molecules decreases M1
star = 4 × (½) × 2.0 × 10 C1
so temperature lower
= 3.2 × 1031 kg A1
A1 [3]
[3]
2 3 2
or Mstar = (2π) Rstar / GT (C1)
2 11 3 –11 2
= {(2π) × (6.0 × 10 ) } / {6.67 × 10 × (2 × 365 × 24 × 3600) } (C1)
= 3.2 × 1031 kg (A1)
22
2 (a) (i) sum of kinetic and potential energies of the molecules M1
reference to random distribution A1 [2]
(ii) for ideal gas, no intermolecular forces M1

so no potential energy (only kinetic) A1 [2]
= 2240 J A1 [2]
or R = kNA
energy = 3/2 × 1.0 × 8.31 × 180 (C1)
= 2240 J (A1)
(ii) increase in internal energy = heat supplied + work done on system B1

2240 = energy supplied – 1500 C1
energy supplied =©3740
Cambridge
J International Examinations 2013 A1 [3]

from infinity (to the point) A1 [2]
(b) (i) either both potentials are positive / same sign M1

so same sign A1 [2]
or gradients are positive & negative (so fields in opposite directions) (M1)
so same sign (A1)
(iv) V = 0.43 V (allow 0.42 V → 0.44 V) M1

energy = 2 × 1.6 × 10–19 × 0.43 A1
= 1.4 × 10–19 J A1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 249

or change in potential = (1/5 – 1/6) × (6.3 × 107) (C1)
change in energy = (1/5 – 1/6) × (6.3 × 107) × 1.3 (C1)
= 2.7 × 106 J (A1) [4]
23
2 (a) the number of atoms M1
in 12 g of carbon-12 A1 [2]
(b) (i) amount = 3.2/40

= 0.080 mol A1 [1]
(ii) pV = nRT
p × 210 × 10–6 = 0.080 × 8.31 × 310 C1
p = 9.8 × 105 Pa A1 [2]
(do not credit if T in °C not K)
(iii) either pV = 1/3 × Nm <c2>

N = 0.080 × 6.02 × 1023 (= 4.82 × 1022)
and m = 40 × 1.66 × 10–27 (= 6.64 × 10–26) C1
9.8 × 105 × 210 × 10–6 = 1/3 × 4.82 × 1022 × 6.64 × 10–26 × <c2> C1
<c2> = 1.93 × 105
cRMS = 440 m s–1 A1 [3]
or Nm = 3.2 × 10–3 (C1)

9.8 × 105 × 210 × 10–6 = 1/3 × 3.2 × 10–3 × <c2> (C1)
<c2> = 1.93 × 105
cRMS = 440 m s–1 (A1)
or 1/2 m<c2> = 3/2 kT (C1)

1/2 × 40 × 1.66 × 10–27 <c2> = 3/2 × 1.38 × 10–23 × 310 (C1)
<c2> = 1.93 × 105
cRMS = 440 m s–1 (A1)
(if T in °C not K award max 1/3, unless already penalised in (b)(ii))
CEDAR COLLEGE 250

0
induced e.m.f. gives rise to currents which generate a magnetic field (B1)
so stone could not enter into orbit A1
the magnetic field opposes the motion of the magnet so amplitude decreases (B1) [2]
[3]
(b) (i) as magnet moves,
(expressions in (a) flux
2and
is cut by cup / aluminium giving rise to induced e.m.f.
2 (b)(i) must be dimensionally correct)
(ii) cup)use of ½mω x0 and x0 = 0.75 cm or x0 is halved so ¼ energy
either
(in C1
B1
to give new energy = 1.6 mJ
24
2 (a) use induced
of kelvin e.m.f. gives rise to currents and heating of the cup
temperatures B1
B1
either loss in energy = 6.4 – 1.6 or loss = ¾ × 6.4 giving loss = 4.8 mJ A1 [2]
boththermal energy
values of (V / T)derived
correctfrom oscillations
(11.87), of magnet
V / T is constant soso amplitude
pressure decreases
is constant B1
M1 [2]
or
(allow use ofe.m.f.
induced n R1.gives
Do notrise
allowto currents whichofgenerate
other values n.) a magnetic field (B1)
(c) q = mc∆θ
the magnetic field opposes the motion of the magnet so amplitude decreases (B1) [3]
(b) 4.8 10–3done
(i) ×work = 6.2 R× 10 –3
p∆V × 910 × ∆θ C1
–4 2 2
∆θ = 8.5 × 10 K
(ii) either use ofR½mω 0 and
4.2 × x10 5 x0 =–0.75
× (3.87 3.49)cm×or
10x0×is10
3 halved so ¼ energy
–6 A1
C1
C1 [2]
= = = = to
= give new R energy
160 J= 1.6 mJ A1 [2]
2 (a) smooth curve with decreasing
6.4 gradient, not =starting atgiving
x = 0 loss = 4.8 mJ M1
(do notloss
either in energy
allow use of V= instead
– 1.6ofor loss
∆V) ¾ × 6.4 A1 [2]
end of line not at g = 0 or horizontal A1 [2]
(ii) increase / change in internal energy R heating of system
(c) q = mc∆θ N work done on system C1
(b) 4.8 × 10–3
straight line
= 6.2 10–3 × 910
with×positive gradient
× ∆θ R 565 – 160
M1
C1
line starts at –4
origin A1 [2]
= = = == 8.5 × 10 K
∆θ R 405 J A1
A1 [2]
[2]
2 (c)
(a) sinusoidal
smooth shape
curve with decreasing gradient, not B1
(c) internal
onlyof energy
positive R sum
values ofpeak
and kinetic energy
/ trough andstarting
height
at x = 0
constant energy / EK N EP
potential M1
B1
B1
end
no line not at g = 0
intermolecular forces or horizontal A1
M1 [2]
4 ‘loops’ B1 [3]
no potential energy (so ∆U R ∆EK) A1 [3]
(b) straight line with positive gradient M1
3 (a) line
initially,
starts = (2.40 × 105 × 5.00 × 10–4) / 288 = 0.417
pVat/ Torigin M1
A1 [2]
3 (a) resonance B1 [1]
finally, pV / T = (2.40 × 105 × 14.5 × 10–4) / 835 = 0.417 M1
(allow 2 marks
(c) sinusoidal shape for two determinations of V / T and then 1 mark for V / T and p B1
(b) Pt R mc
constant, ∆θ
so values
ideal) and peak / trough height constant C1
only positive B1
4750 × 2 × 60 R 0.28 × c × (98 – 25)
‘loops’ C1
B1 [3]
c R 4400 J kg–1 K–1 A1 [3]
25
3 (use of ∆θ
(a) initially, pV R / T73 N 273× max.
= (2.40 / 3) × 10–4) / 288 = 0.417
105 × 15.00 M1
(use ofpV
finally, s not
t R/ T2 = 120× 10
(2.40 s max.
5 2 / 3)× 10–4) / 835 = 0.417
× 14.5 M1
Page 3(allow 2 marks for two determinations Mark Scheme Syllabus
of V / T and then 1 mark for V / T and p Paper
Cambridge © Cambridge International Examinations
International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 2014 9702 43
constant, so ideal)
(b) (i) work done = p∆V

= 2.40 105 × (14.5
© ×Cambridge International 10–4
– 5.00) × Examinations 2014 C1
= 228 J (ignore sign, not 2 s.f.) A1 [2]
(ii) ∆U = q + w = 569 – 228

= 341 J M1
increase A1 [2]
4 (a) acceleration / force proportional

© CambridgetoInternational
displacement (from a fixed
Examinations point)
2014 M1
either acceleration and displacement in opposite directions
or acceleration always directed towards a fixed point A1 [2]
(b) (i) zero & 0.625 s or 0.625 s & 1.25 s or 1.25 s & 1.875 s or 1.875 s & 2.5 s A1 [1]
(ii) 1. ω = 2π / T and v0 = ωx0 C1

ω = 2π / 1.25
= 5.03 rad s–1 C1
v0 = 5.03 × 3.2
CEDAR COLLEGE = 16.1 cm s–1 (allow 2 s.f.) 251
A1 [3]
2. v = ω ( x 02 − x 2 )
Page 2alternative method: mass ofMark Neptune = 1.019 × 1026 kg
Scheme Syllabus (C1)
Paper
25
mass of Uranus
Cambridge International AS / =
A 8.621
Level ×– 10
Maykg/ June 2015 9702 (C1)
42
ratio = 1.18 (A1) [3]
1 (a) (i) 1. F = Gm1m2 / x2
26 = (6.67 × 10–11 × 2.50 × 5.98 × 1024 ) / (6.37 × 106 )2 M1
2 (a) (sum of) potential
= 24.6 Nenergy
(acceptand kinetic
2 s.f. energy of molecules/atoms/particles
or more) M1
A1 [2]
mention of random motion/distribution A1 [2]
2. F = mxω2 or F = mv 2 / x and v = ωx (accept x or r for distance) C1
= 2.50 × 6.37 × 106 × (2π / 24 × 3600)2
(b) (i) pV = nRT
= 0.0842 N (accept 2 s.f. or more) A1 [2]
either at A, 1.2 × 105 × 4.0 × 10−3 = n × 8.31 × 290
5
(ii) or at B, = 24.575
reading 3.6 × 10 × 4.0 × 10−3 = n × 8.31 × 870
– 0.0842 C1
B1
n = 0.20 mol
= 24.5 N (accept only 3 s.f.) A1
A1 [2]
[2]
× 105 × 7.75
(ii) 1.2Cambridge × 10–3 = 0.20AS
International × 8.31 × T or– T
/ A Level = (7.75
May / June/ 4.0)
2015× 290 9702 C142
T = 560 K
(b) gravitational force provides the centripetal force A1
M1 [2]
–3
1 (a) (i) (Allow
1. F = tolerance
gravitational Gm 2
from graph:
/ x‘equal’
1m2 is
force to the7.7–7.8
centripetal m3)
× 10force
2 –11 24 6 2
(accept Gm = (6.67
1m2 / x× 10= mxω×2 2.50
or FC× =5.98
FG) × 10 ) / (6.37 × 10 ) M1
M1
= 24.6 N (accept
‘weight’/sensation 2 s.f. or more)
of weight/contact force/reaction force is difference between FG A1 [2]
(c) temperature
and FC whichchanges/decreases
is zero so internal energy changes/decreases B1
A1 [3]
volume = mxω2 (at
2. Fchanges or F = mv 2 / pressure)
constant x and v = ωx so work is done
(accept x or r for distance) B1
C1 [2]
6 2
= 2.50 × 6.37 × 10 × (2π / 24 × 3600)
2 (a) mean speed = 0.0842 103 m s–1
= 1.44N×(accept 2 s.f. or more) A1
A1 [1]
[2]
3 (a) (numerically equal to) quantity of (thermal) energy/heat to change state/phase of
unit reading
(ii) mass = 24.575 – 0.0842 M1
B1
(b) evidence oftemperature
at constant summing of individual
= 24.5 N (accept only 3squared
s.f.) speeds A1
C1
A1 [2]
[2]
(allow 1/2 for definition
mean square speed = 2.09 restricted
× 106 to
m2fusion
s–2 or vaporisation) A1 [2]
(b) (i) at 70 W, mass s–1 = 0.26 g s–1 A1
(b) gravitational force provides the centripetal force M1
at 110 W, mass s–1 = 0.38 g s–1 3 A1 [2]
(c) gravitational
root-mean-square
force isspeed
‘equal’= to
1.45 10 m s–1 force
the×centripetal A1 [1]
2 2
(allow ECF
(accept Gm1m from
2 / x (b) but only
= mxω or ifFCarithmetic
= F G) error) M1
‘weight’/sensation of weight/contact force/reaction force is difference between FG
and FC which is zero A1 [3]
3 (a) (numerically equal to) quantity of heat/(thermal) energy to change state/phase of
unit mass M1
27
2 at constant
(a) mean = 1.44 × 103 m s–1
speedtemperature A1 [1]
A1 [2]
(allow 1/2 for definition restricted to fusion or vaporisation)
(b) evidence of summing of individual squared speeds C1

6
(b) mean
(i) constant gradient/straight
square speed m2(allow
= 2.09 × 10line s–2 linear/constant slope) B1
A1 [1]
[2]
(ii) Pt = mL or power = gradient × L C1
(c) root-mean-square speed = 1.45 × 103 m s–1 A1 [1]
(allowuse
ECF of from
gradient of graph
(b) but only if arithmetic error)
(or two points separated by at least 3.5 minutes) M1
3 110 × 60equal
(a) (numerically = L ×to)
(372 10–3 / 7.0
– 325)of×heat/(thermal)
quantity energy to change state/phase of
L = 9.80 × 105 J kg–1 (accept 2 s.f.) (allow 9.8 to 9.9 rounded to 2 s.f.)
unit mass A1
M1 [3]
at constant temperature A1 [2]
(iii)
(allowsome energy/heat
1/2 for is lost to the
definition restricted surroundings
to fusion or vapour condenses on sides
or vaporisation) M1
so value is an overestimate A1 [2]
(b) (i) constant gradient/straight line (allow linear/constant slope) B1 [1]

4 (a) displacement (directly) proportional to acceleration/force M1
Pt =displacement
either
(ii) mL or power and acceleration
= gradient ×L in opposite directions C1
or acceleration (always) towards a (fixed) point A1 [2]
use of gradient of graph
(or two points separated by at least 3.5 minutes) M1
110 × 60 = L × (372 – 325) × 10–3 / 7.0

L = 9.80 × 105 J kg©–1 Cambridge International Examinations 2015
(accept 2 s.f.) (allow 9.8 to 9.9 rounded to 2 s.f.) A1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 252
(iii) some energy/heat is lost to the surroundings or vapour condenses on sides M1
so value is an overestimate A1 [2]
A2
TEMPERATURE 
CEDAR COLLEGE 253

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Some water in a saucepan is boiling.
(a) Explain why
(i) external work is done by the boiling water,
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) there is a change in the internal energy as water changes to steam.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) By reference to the first law of thermodynamics and your answers in (a), show that
thermal energy must be supplied to the water during the boiling process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 254

9702/4 M/J/02 [Turn over
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 A kettle is rated as 2.3 kW. A mass of 750 g of water at 20 °C is poured into the kettle. When
the kettle is switched on, it takes 2.0 minutes for the water to start boiling. In a further
7.0 minutes, one half of the mass of water is boiled away.
(a) Estimate, for this water,
(i) the specific heat capacity,
specific heat capacity = ........................................ J kg–1 K–1
(ii) the specific latent heat of vaporisation.
specific latent heat = ........................................ J kg–1

[5]
(b) State one assumption made in your calculations, and explain whether this will lead to
an overestimation or an underestimation of the value for the specific latent heat.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9702/4 O/N/02
CEDAR COLLEGE 255

CEDAR COLLEGE 256

CEDAR COLLEGE 257
2 (a) State what is meant by
(i) the Avogadro constant NA,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the mole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A container has a volume of 1.8 × 104 cm3.
The ideal gas in the container has a pressure of 2.0 × 107 Pa at a temperature of 17 °C.
Show that the amount of gas in the cylinder is 150 mol.
[1]
(c) Gas molecules leak from the container in (b) at a constant rate of 1.5 × 1019 s−1.
The temperature remains at 17 °C.
In a time t, the amount of gas in the container is found to be reduced by 5.0%.
Calculate
(i) the pressure of the gas after the time t,
pressure = ................................................... Pa [2]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/M/J/16
CEDAR COLLEGE 258

7
(ii) the time t.
t = ....................................................... s [3]
[Total: 9]
 
3 (a) Explain what is meant by the statement that two bodies are in thermal equilibrium.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Suggest suitable types of thermometer, one in each case, to measure
(i) the temperature of the flame of a Bunsen burner,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) the change in temperature of a small crystal when it is exposed to a pulse of ultrasound
energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Some water is heated so that its temperature changes from 26.5 °C to a final temperature of
38.0 °C.
State, to an appropriate number of decimal places,
(i) the change in temperature in kelvin,
change = ..................................................... K [1]
(ii) the final temperature in kelvin.
final temperature = ..................................................... K [1]
[Total: 5]
CEDAR
© UCLES 2016 COLLEGE 9702/42/M/J/16
259
[Turn over
5 Mar 2016 , Question #3 , qp_42 8
3 (a) Define specific heat capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A student carries out an experiment to determine the specific heat capacity of a liquid using
the apparatus illustrated in Fig. 3.1.
liquid out,
tube temperature 25.5 °C
liquid in, heating

temperature 19.5 °C coil
Fig. 3.1
Liquid enters the tube at a constant temperature of 19.5 °C and leaves the tube at
a temperature of 25.5 °C. The mass of liquid flowing through the tube per unit time is m.
Electrical power P is dissipated in the heating coil.
The student changes m and adjusts P until the final temperature of the liquid leaving the tube
is 25.5 °C.
The data shown in Fig. 3.2 are obtained.
m / g s–1 P/W
1.11 33.3
1.58 44.9
Fig. 3.2
(i) Suggest why the student obtains data for two values of m, rather than for one value.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16
CEDAR COLLEGE 260

9
(ii) Calculate the specific heat capacity of the liquid.
Show your working.
specific heat capacity = .......................................... J kg–1 K–1 [3]
(c) When the heating coil in (b) dissipates 33.3 W of power, the potential difference V across the
coil is given by the expression
V = 27.0 sin (395t).
The potential difference is measured in volts and the time t is measured in seconds.
Determine the resistance of the coil.
resistance = ....................................................... Ω [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 9702/42/F/M/16 [Turn over
CEDAR COLLEGE 261

THERMOMETRY
14
Examiner’s
Use
7 The e.m.f. generated in a thermocouple thermometer may be used for the measurement of
temperature.
Fig. 7.1 shows the variation with temperature T of the e.m.f. E.
1.5
E / mV
1.0
0.5
0
300 400 500 600 700
T/K
Fig. 7.1
(a) By reference to Fig. 7.1, state two disadvantages of using this thermocouple when the
e.m.f. is about 1.0 mV.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) An alternative to the thermocouple thermometer is the resistance thermometer.
State two advantages that a thermocouple thermometer has over a resistance

thermometer.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 262

7
Examiner’s
Use
3 The electrical resistance of a thermistor is to be used to measure temperatures in the range
12 °C to 24 °C. Fig. 3.1 shows the variation with temperature, measured in degrees Celsius,
of the resistance of the thermistor.
2400
2200
resistance
/
2000
1800
1600
1400
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26
temperature /
Fig. 3.1
(a) State and explain the feature of Fig. 3.1 which shows that the thermometer has a
sensitivity that varies with temperature.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) At one particular temperature, the resistance of the thermistor is 2040 ± 20 .

Determine this temperature, in kelvin, to an appropriate number of decimal places.
temperature = ……………………… K [3]

CEDAR COLLEGE 263

..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
2 A mercury-in-glass thermometer is to be used to measure the temperature of some oil.
The oil has mass 32.0 g and specific heat capacity 1.40 J g–1 K–1. The actual temperature of
the oil is 54.0 °C.
The bulb of the thermometer has mass 12.0 g and an average specific heat capacity of
0.180 J g–1 K–1. Before immersing the bulb in the oil, the thermometer reads 19.0 °C.
The thermometer bulb is placed in the oil and the steady reading on the thermometer is
taken.
(a) Determine
(i) the steady temperature recorded on the thermometer,
temperature = ………………………… °C [3]
© UCLES 2006 9702/04/O/N/06
CEDAR COLLEGE 264

5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) the ratio
change in temperature of oil .

initial temperature of oil
ratio = ………………………… [1]
(b) Suggest, with an explanation, a type of thermometer that would be likely to give a
smaller value for the ratio calculated in (a)(ii).
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The mercury-in-glass thermometer is used to measure the boiling point of a liquid.
Suggest why the measured value of the boiling point will not be affected by the thermal
energy absorbed by the thermometer bulb.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

CEDAR COLLEGE 265
THERMISTORS
18
10 The circuit of Fig. 10.1 may be used to indicate temperature change. For
Examiner’s
Use
+2 V
T P
+5V
–5V R G
P P
Fig. 10.1
The resistance of the thermistor T at 16 °C is 2100 Ω and at 18 °C, the resistance is 1900 Ω.
Each resistor P has a resistance of 2000 Ω.
Determine the change in the states of the light-emitting diodes R and G as the temperature
of the thermistor changes from 16 °C to 18 °C.
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 266

3 (a) The resistance of a thermistor at 0 °C is 3840 Ω. At 100 °C the resistance is 190 Ω. For
When the thermistor is placed in water at a particular constant temperature, its resistance Examiner’s
is 2300 Ω. Use
(i) Assuming that the resistance of the thermistor varies linearly with temperature,
calculate the temperature of the water.
temperature = ......................................... °C [2]
(ii) The temperature of the water, as measured on the thermodynamic scale of

temperature, is 286 K.
By reference to what is meant by the thermodynamic scale of temperature, comment

on your answer in (i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(b) A polystyrene cup contains a mass of 95 g of water at 28 °C.
A cube of ice of mass 12 g is put into the water. Initially, the ice is at 0 °C. The water, of
specific heat capacity 4.2 × 103 J kg–1 K–1, is stirred until all the ice melts.
Assuming that the cup has negligible mass and that there is no heat exchange with the
atmosphere, calculate the final temperature of the water.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J kg–1.
temperature = ......................................... °C [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 267

© UCLES 2010 9702/42/M/J/10
ANSWERS
1

1 (a) work done in bringing/moving unit mass ......................................M1

from infinity to the point.......................................................... ...... A1 [2]
2
(use of 1 kg in the definition – max 1/2)
(b) potential at infinity defined as being zero........................ ............. B1

forces are always attractive.......................................................... B1
so work got out in moving to point...................... .......................... B1 [3]
(max potential is at infinity – allow 1/3)
(c) (i) φ = -GM/R

change = 6.67 x 10-11 x 6.0 x 1024 x({6.4 x 106}-1- {1.94 x 107}-1) .....C2
change = 4.19 x 107 J kg-1 (ignore sign) .........................................A1
(ii) ½mv2 = m φ ................................................................................ C1

v2 = 2 x 4.19 x 107 = 8.38 x 107
v = 9150 m s-1 .............................................................................. A1 [5]
(d) acceleration is not constant.......................................................... B1 [1]
32 (a)
(-1 for each error or omission) ........................................ B2 [2]
(b) heat lost by liquid gold = 0.95m x 129 x ∆T.................................. C1

heat gained (silver) = 0.05m x 235 x (1340 – 300) + 0.05m x 105 000..C1, C1
122.5m∆T = 17 470m
∆T = 143 K.......................................................................................C1
temperature = 143 + 1340 = 1483 K................................................A1 [5]
3 (a) f0 is at natural frequency of spring (system) ................................. B1

this is at the driver frequency ....................................................... B1 [2]
(b) line: amplitude less at all frequencies ......................................... B1

peak flatter .......................................................................... B1
peak at f0 or slightly below f0 ................................................ B1 [3]
CEDAR(c)
COLLEGE (aluminium) sheet cuts the magnetic flux/field.............................. B1 268
(so) currents/e.m.f. induced in the (metal) sheet .......................... B1
these currents dissipate energy ...................................................M1
less energy available for the oscillations ...................................... A1
B
= (2.8 × 1011)2 × (7.0 × 1010 ) × (4.98 × 10–8 )2 / (6.67 × 10–11) C1
= 2.0 × 1029 kg A1 [3]
24 (a) (i) number of atoms/nuclei in 12 g of carbon-12 B1 [1]
(ii) amount of substance M1
containing NA (or 6.02 × 1023 ) particles/molecules/atoms

or
which contains the same number of particles/atoms/molecules as there
are atoms in 12 g of carbon-12 A1 [2]
(b) pV = nRT
2.0 × 107 × 1.8 × 104 × 10–6 = n × 8.31 × 290, so n = 149 mol or 150 mol A1 [1]
(c) (i) V and T constant and so pressure reduced by 5.0%

pressure = 0.95 × 2.0 × 107 C1
or
calculation of new n (= 142.5 mol) and correct substitution into pV = nRT (C1)
pressure = 1.9 × 107 Pa A1 [2]

(ii) loss is 5 / 100 × 150 mol = 7.5 mol

or
∆N = 4.52 × 1024 C1
t = (7.5 × 6.02 × 1023 © 1.5 × 1019 International Examinations 2016

) / Cambridge
or
t = 4.52 × 1024 / 1.5 × 1019 C1
= 3.0 × 105 s A1 [3]
3 (a) no net energy transfer between the bodies

or
bodies are at the same temperature B1 [1]
(b) (i) thermocouple, platinum/metal resistance thermometer, pyrometer B1 [1]
(ii) thermistor, thermocouple B1 [1]
(c) (i) change = 11.5 K B1 [1]
(ii) final temperature = 311.2 K B1 [1]
4 (a) (i) T = 0.60 s and ω = 2π / T C1
ω = 10 (10.47) rad s–1 A1 [2]
(ii) energy = ½mω2x0 2 or ½mv2 and v = ωx0 C1

CEDAR COLLEGE 269
–3 2 –2 2
= ½ × 120 × 10 × (10.5) × (2.0 × 10 )
–3
(iii) internal energy = 5.9 × 10–21 × 3.2 × 1023
= 1900 (1890) J A1 [1]
53 (a) the (thermal) energy per unit mass to raise the temperature M1
of a substance by one degree A1 [2]
(If ratio not clear for M1 mark, allow 1 / 2 marks for an otherwise correct answer)
(b) 1(i) to allow for / determine /Mark

Page cancelScheme
heat transfer to / from tube / surroundings
Syllabus B1
Paper [1]
GCE A/AS Level – May/June 2006 9702 04
(do not allow ‘to stop / prevent’ heat loss)
1 (a) centripetal force is provided by gravitational force B1
(ii)2 / either
mv r = GMm P =/mc∆θ
r2 ±h B1
–3
henceorv 44.9 = 1.58
= √(GM / r) × 10–3 × c × (25.5 – 19.5) ± h A0 [2]
or 33.3 = 1.11 × 10 × c × (25.5 – 19.5) ± h B1
(b) (i) E(44.9 2
– 33.3) = (1.58 – 1.11) × 10–3 × c × (25.5 – 19.5)
K (= ½mv ) = GMm / 2r
C1
B1 [1]
Page 3 c = 4100 (4110) J kg–1 K–1Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper A1 [3]
(ii) EP = - GMm / r B1 [1]
(allow 1 / 3 for use -3of only 33.3 W, 1.11 23
g s leading to 5000 J kg –1 K –1)
–1
(ii) (allow
N =1{(2.24 x 10 )/224} x 6.02 x 10 –1 –1 –1 1
(iii) ET = - GMm / 3 for
/ r +use
GMm / 2r 44.9 W, 1.58 g s leading to 4740 J kg K )
of only C1
= 6.02 x 1018 1
= - GMm / 2r. A1 [2]
activity = λN
-6
(c) (i)V0 =if 27
(c) ET decreases = 2.23thenxV-10
or GMm
rms =x19.1
6.02 1018
/ 2r xbecomes more negative 1 C1
13
33.3or=GMm 272 / 2R
/ 2r =becomes
1.3
or x 10
33.3larger= 19.12 / R
Bq 1 [4] M1
C1
R =so 11r Ωdecreases A1 [2]
A1 [3]
(c) A = A0 e-ln2.tlT
(ii)0.1E= exp(-In2 . n)
K = GMm / 2r and r decreases
1 M1
n
4 (a) amplitude= 3.32 = 1.8vcm
so (EK and) and period = 0.30 s
increases 1 [2] A1
A1 [2]
[1]
(n = 3 without working scores 1 mark)
2 (a) e.g. fixed mass/ amount of gas
76 (a) Evariation
½m ωis2 (x
non-linear
2 2
EK = ½mv2 and v = ± ω √(x0 2 – x2) 1
K = gas
(b) ideal 0 – x ) or C1
two
(any=two,possible
½ × 10.080 temperatures 2 –2 2
each)× (2π/ 0.30) × [(1.8 × 10 ) – (1.2 × 10 ) ] –2 2 1 [2] B2
C1 [2]
= 3.2 × 10–3 J A1 [3]
(b) (i) n =1.pV
(b) e.g. small
/ RTthermal capacity/measure ∆θ of small object C1
= (2.5 × 10response
/short 7
× 4.00 ×time
104 x 10-6 ) / (8.31 × 290) C1
5 (a) (i) (series 2 readings
= 415of) taken at
‘highs’ and ‘lows’
mol a point/physically
/ ‘on’ and ‘off’ small
/ 1’s and 0’s / two values M1 [3]
A1
3 can be used to measure
with no intermediate values / the temperature
values aredifference
discrete A1 [2]
4 no power supply required
(ii) volume of gas at 1.85 × 105 Pa = (2.5 × 107 × 4.00 × 104 ) / (1.85 × 105 )
(ii) eitheretc.use higher (any two, 1 mark
sampling each) rate
= 5.41 × /10
frequency 6
cm3
2 [2]
C1
or 5.41 ×use 6 4 3
so, 10 more= 4.00bits
× 10in each
+ 7.24 × 10 /N
sample each digital number C1
or
N = 741 use more levels in each sample B1 [3]
A1 [1]
(answer 740 or fails to allow for gas in cylinder, max 2/3 )
37 voltage of
(b) gradient
(a) = 30 mV is (a measure of) the sensitivity
graph A1 [1]
M1
the gradient varies with temperature A1 [2]
6 (b) speed
(a) 2040 ± 20= ZΩ/ ρ
corresponds to 15.0 ± 0.2 °C C1
T / K = T=/ 1.4 106 / 940(allow
°C +× 273.15 (=1490)
273.2) C1
C1
–2
time = (1.1 × 10
temperature is 288.2 K × 2) / 1490 C1
A1 [3]
= 1.5 × 10–5 s A1 [3]
1.0of 7.4 × 10–6 s is one way only and scores 2 / 3 marks)
4 (a) (i)(time B1 [1]
(use of speed of light is wrong physics and scores 0 / 3 marks)
(ii) 40 Hz B1 [1]
(b) (i) speed = 2πfa © Cambridge International Examinations 2016 C1

= 2π × 40 × 42 × 10-3
= 10.6 m s-1 A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE
(ii) acceleration = 4π2 f2 a 270
C1
= (80π)2 × 42 × 10-3
= 2650 m s-2 A1 [2]
electric forces can be attractive or repulsive B1
for gravitational, work got out as masses come together
Page 6 /mass moves
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ from infinity
version Syllabus Paper B1
for electric, work done on charges if same sign,
GCE A/AS LEVEL – October/November work got out2009
if opposite sign as charges
9702 41
come together B1 [4
82 (a) (i)
Section B
idea of heat lost (by oil) = heat gained (by thermometer) C1
32 x 1.4 x (54 – t) = 12 x 0.18 x (t – 19) C1
9 (a) resistance of wire = ρL / A ....................................................................................... B1
t = 52.4°C A1 [3
as crack widens, L increases ....................................................................................M1
(ii) either ratio (= 1.6/54)
and = 0.030 or (=1.6/327)
A decreases = 0.0049
............................................................................M1 A1 [1
so resistance increases ............................................................................................. A0 [3]
(b) thermistor thermometer (allow ‘resistance thermometer’) B1
because small mass/thermal capacity B1 [2
(b) ∆L
(c) / L point
boiling = ∆Rtemperature
/ R ........................................................................................................
is constant B1 M1
= (146.2
further comment – 143.0) / 143.0 × 100 .................................................................. C1
e.g./ L
∆L heating of bulb .........................................................................................................
= 2.24% would affect only rate of boiling A1 A1
[3] [2
3 (a) use of a = – ω 2x clear [Total:C1

6]
either ω = √(2k/m) or ω 2 = (2k/m) B1
ω = 2 πf C1
9 at 16f °C,
10 V+ π)√(2
= (1/2 = 1.00x 300)/0.240)
V and V – = 0.98 V or V+ > V – ........................................................ B1 B1
= 7.96 ≈ 8 Hz A0 [4
at 16 °C, output is positive ................................................................................................M1
diode(i)R is ‘on’
(b) and diode G is ‘off’ .................................................................................... A1
resonance B1 [1
as temperature rises, diode R goes ‘off’ and diode G goes ‘on’ ....................................... B1 [4]
Hz 2nd to 3rd marks and also 3rd to 4th marks)
(allow(ii)e.c.f.8 from B1 [1
Page(increase
(c) 5 Mark
amount of) Scheme: Teachers’ version
damping Syllabus Paper B1
[Total: 4]
without altering (kGCE
or) mAS/A
…(someLEVEL – May/June
indirect reference is2010
acceptable) 9702 41 B1
sensible suggestion B1 [3
10
10 (a) X-ray taken of slice /–1plane / section B1
11 large(i) / 1 T magnetic –1
4 (a) repeated GMm {(R +field
at different
applied
– (R + halong
h1) angles 2) }
body (allow ‘across’) (1)
B1 B1
r.f. pulse applied {v12 –...............................................................................................................
v2 2} (1)
images½m / data is processed B1 B1 [2
causes hydrogen nuclei / protons ..................................................................................... (1)
(b) combined /xadded to givex (2-D)
10–11 {(26.28 106)–1 image
– (29.08ofxslice
106)–1} = 53702 – 50902
2M x 6.67....................................................................................................................... B1 B1
to resonate –19
(1)
repeated
(nuclei) 4.888for
M xreturn successive
xto10equilibrium x 106 / after relaxation time .................................................B1
= 2.929 slices
state (1) C1
24
toMbuild upx a103-D
= 6.00 image
kg............................................................................................................B1 A1 [3
r.f. (pulse) emitted (1)
image can be
(If equation in viewed from different
(a) is dimensionally anglesthen
unsound, / rotated
0/3 marks in (b), if dimensionally sound butB1
pulses detected, processed and displayed ...................................................................... (1)
incorrect, treat as e.c.f.) max 6 [6]
resonant frequency depends on magnetic field strength .................................................. (1)
calibrated
5 (a) (i) non-uniform
(induced) e.m.f field enables nucleitotorate
proportional/equal be oflocated
change of ................................................
flux (linkage) (1) B1
(b) (i) 16 (allow ‘induced voltage, induced p.d.) A1 [1]
any six points, one
flux is custmark each
as the .......................................................................................... B6
disc moves [6]
M1
hence inducing an e.m.f A0 [2
(ii) evidence of deducting 16 then dividing by 3 C1
[Total: 6]
(ii) to give
field in disc is not uniform/rate of cutting not same/speed of disc not same (over wholeA1 [2]
3 disc)2 B1
so different e.m.f.’s in different parts of disc M1
6 lead5to eddy currents A0 [2
(b) eddy currents dissipate thermal energy in disc B1

energy derived
11 (a) frequency from oscillation
of carrier wave varies of disc
(in synchrony) with signal M1 B1
(in synchrony) with displacement of of
energy of disc depends on amplitude oscillations
signal A1 B1
[2] [3
(b) advantages e.g. less noise / less interference

© UCLES 2006
greater bandwidth / better quality
(1 each, max 2)
disadvantages e.g. short range / more transmitters / line of sight
more complex circuitry
greater expense
(1 each, max 2) B4 [4]
12 (a) gain / loss/dB = 10 lg(P1/P2) C1

190 = 10 lg(18 × 103 / P2)
CEDAR COLLEGE
or –190 = 10 lg P2 / 18 × 103)
© UCLES 2009 271
C1
power = 1.8 × 10–15 W A1 [3]
A2
THERMODYNAMICS 
CEDAR COLLEGE 272

Examiner’s
Use
6 The first law of thermodynamics may be expressed in the form
U = q + w,
where U is the internal energy of the system,

U is the increase in internal energy,
q is the thermal energy supplied to the system,
w is the work done on the system.
Complete Fig. 6.1 for each of the processes shown. Write down the symbol ‘+’ for an
increase, the symbol ‘–’ to indicate a decrease and the symbol ‘0’ for no change, as
appropriate.
U q w
the compression of an ideal gas at

constant temperature
the heating of a solid with no

expansion
the melting of ice at 0 °C to give water

at 0 °C
(Note: ice is less dense than water)
[6]
Fig. 6.1
CEDAR COLLEGE 273
© UCLES 2004 9702/04/M/J/04

18
Examiner’s
Use
13 A certain engine operates on the cycle illustrated in Fig. 13.1.
pressure A B
55
105 Pa
1020 J
400 J
C
6
1 O
40 150 760
volume / cm3
Fig. 13.1
A mass of gas is firstly compressed adiabatically (O → A) such that 400 J of work is done on
the gas. During the stage A → B, fuel is injected into the gas and this causes heating at
constant pressure as the fuel burns. The gas and burned fuel then expand adiabatically
(B → C) and, during this process, 1020 J of work is done by the gas and burned fuel. Finally,
during the stage C → O, energy is wasted.
(a) (i) During the stage A → B, 2500 J of energy is supplied to the gas. Show that the
work done by the gas as it expands during this stage is 605 J.
(ii) Calculate the energy wasted during the stage C → O.
energy = ..................................... J
CEDAR COLLEGE 274

© UCLES 2004 9702/06/M/J/04
6
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) State the first law of thermodynamics in terms of the increase in internal energy U, the
heating q of the system and the work w done on the system.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The volume occupied by 1.00 mol of liquid water at 100 °C is 1.87 10–5 m3. When the
water is vaporised at an atmospheric pressure of 1.03 105 Pa, the water vapour has a
volume of 2.96 10–2 m3.
The latent heat required to vaporise 1.00 mol of water at 100 °C and 1.03 105 Pa is
4.05 104 J.
Determine, for this change of state,
(i) the work w done on the system,
w = ……………………………. J [2]
(ii) the heating q of the system,
q = ……………………………. J [1]
(iii) the increase in internal energy U of the system.
U = ……………………………. J [1]
CEDAR COLLEGE 275

© UCLES 2005 9702/04/O/N/05
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Using your answer to (b)(iii), estimate the binding energy per molecule in liquid water.
energy = ………………………………. J [2]
© UCLES
CEDAR 2005
COLLEGE 9702/04/O/N/05 [Turn
276over
10
4 (a) Write down an equation to represent the first law of thermodynamics in terms of the For
heating q of a system, the work w done on the system and the increase U in the Examiner’s
internal energy. Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The pressure of an ideal gas is decreased at constant temperature.

Explain what change, if any, occurs in the internal energy of the gas.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 277

© UCLES 2008 9702/04/O/N/08
2 (a) Some gas, initially at a temperature of 27.2 °C, is heated so that its temperature rises For
to 38.8 °C. Examiner’s
Calculate, in kelvin, to an appropriate number of decimal places, Use
(i) the initial temperature of the gas,
initial temperature = ............................................. K [2]
(ii) the rise in temperature.
rise in temperature = ............................................ K [1]
(b) The pressure p of an ideal gas is given by the expression
p = 13 ρ!c 2"
where ρ is the density of the gas.
(i) State the meaning of the symbol !c 2".
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Use the expression to show that the mean kinetic energy <EK> of the atoms of an
ideal gas is given by the expression
<EK> = 32 kT.
Explain any symbols that you use.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [4]
CEDAR COLLEGE 278

6
(c) Helium-4 may be assumed to behave as an ideal gas. For

A cylinder has a constant volume of 7.8 × 103 cm3 and contains helium-4 gas at a Examiner’s
pressure of 2.1 × 107 Pa and at a temperature of 290 K. Use
Calculate, for the helium gas,
(i) the amount of gas,
amount = ......................................... mol [2]
(ii) the mean kinetic energy of the atoms,
mean kinetic energy = .............................................. J [2]
(iii) the total internal energy.
internal energy = .............................................. J [3]
© UCLES 2010 9702/41/M/J/10

CEDAR COLLEGE 279
2 (a) (i) State the basic assumption of the kinetic theory of gases that leads to the conclusion For
that the potential energy between the atoms of an ideal gas is zero. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the internal energy of a substance.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(iii) Explain why an increase in internal energy of an ideal gas is directly related to a
rise in temperature of the gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A fixed mass of an ideal gas undergoes a cycle PQRP of changes as shown in Fig. 2.1.
10
8 P
volume
/ 10–4 m3
6
2 Q R
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
5
pressure / 10 Pa
Fig. 2.1
CEDAR COLLEGE 280

© UCLES 2010 9702/41/O/N/10
7
(i) State the change in internal energy of the gas during one complete cycle PQRP. For
Examiner’s
change = ............................................. J [1] Use
(ii) Calculate the work done on the gas during the change from P to Q.
work done = .............................................. J [2]
(iii) Some energy changes during the cycle PQRP are shown in Fig. 2.2.
work done on gas heating supplied increase in

change
/J to gas / J internal energy / J
P Q ............................. –600 .............................
Q R 0 +720 .............................
R P ............................. +480 .............................
Fig. 2.2
Complete Fig. 2.2 to show all of the energy changes. [3]

 
CEDAR COLLEGE 281

4 (a) The first law of thermodynamics may be expressed in the form For
Examiner’s
ΔU = q + w. Use
Explain the symbols in this expression.
+ ΔU .................................................................................................................................
+ q ....................................................................................................................................
+ w ...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) State what is meant by specific latent heat.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Use the first law of thermodynamics to explain why the specific latent heat of
vaporisation is greater than the specific latent heat of fusion for a particular
substance.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 282

(c) (i) State what is meant by the internal energy of a substance. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) Use the equation in (b)(ii) to explain that, for an ideal gas, a change in internal
energy ΔU is given by
ΔU ∝ ΔT
where ΔT is the change in temperature of the gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 283

3 (a) State what is meant by the internal energy of a system. For

Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain qualitatively the change, if any, in the internal energy of the following
systems:
(i) a lump of ice at 0 °C melts to form liquid water at 0 °C,
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) a cylinder containing gas at constant volume is in sunlight so that its temperature
rises from 25 °C to 35 °C.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 284

2 A student suggests that, when an ideal gas is heated from 100 °C to 200 °C, the internal For
energy of the gas is doubled. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) State what is meant by internal energy.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) By reference to one of the assumptions of the kinetic theory of gases and your
answer in (i), deduce what is meant by the internal energy of an ideal gas.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) State and explain whether the student’s suggestion is correct.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 285

© UCLES 2012 9702/41/O/N/12
2 (a) The volume of an ideal gas in a cylinder is 1.80 × 10–3 m3 at a pressure of 2.60 × 105 Pa For
and a temperature of 297 K, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
ideal gas
1.80 × 10–3 m3
2.60 × 105 Pa
297 K
Fig. 2.1
The thermal energy required to raise the temperature by 1.00 K of 1.00 mol of the gas at
constant volume is 12.5 J.
The gas is heated at constant volume such that the internal energy of the gas increases
by 95.0 J.
(i) Calculate
1. the amount of gas, in mol, in the cylinder,
amount = ........................................... mol [2]
2. the rise in temperature of the gas.
temperature rise = .............................................. K [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 286

6
(ii) Use your answer in (i) part 2 to show that the final pressure of the gas in the For
cylinder is 2.95 × 105 Pa. Examiner’s
Use
[1]
(b) The gas is now allowed to expand. No thermal energy enters or leaves the gas.
The gas does 120 J of work when expanding against the external pressure.
State and explain whether the final temperature of the gas is above or below 297 K.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2013 9702/42/M/J/13

CEDAR COLLEGE 287
(ii) During the heating, the gas expands, doing 1.5 × 103 J of work. For
State the first law of thermodynamics. Use the law and your answer in (i) to Examiner’s
determine the total energy supplied to the gas. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
total energy = ............................................. J [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE 288

7
3 The volume of 1.00 kg of water in the liquid state at 100 °C is 1.00 × 10−3 m3. The volume of 1.00 kg
of water vapour at 100 °C and atmospheric pressure 1.01 × 105 Pa is 1.69 m3.
(a) Show that the work done against the atmosphere when 1.00 kg of liquid water becomes water
vapour is 1.71 × 105 J.
[2]
(b) (i) The first law of thermodynamics may be given by the expression
ΔU = + q + w
where ΔU is the increase in internal energy of the system.
State what is meant by
1. + q,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. + w.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water at 100 °C is 2.26 × 106 J kg−1.
A mass of 1.00 kg of liquid water becomes water vapour at 100 °C.
Determine, using your answer in (a), the increase in internal energy of this mass of water
during vaporisation.
increase in internal energy = ..................................................... J [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 289

ratio = 2.0 (allow 1 s.f.) A1 [2]
(ii) advantage: e.g. easy to change the voltage B1
disadvantage: e.g. cables require greater insulation
....... rectification – with some justification B1 [2]
GM / R2 = Rω2 …………….…………………...…..…………………..
(d)
1 (a)
(i) 3.0 A (allow 1 s.f.) ANSWERS
ω = 2π / (24 × 3600) ………………………………..……..……………
A1
C1
C1
(ii) 3.0 A (allow –11
1 s.f.) A1 [2]
6.67 × 10 × 6.0 × 1024 = R3 × ω2
3 22 Total [9]
6 1 0 R =- 7.57 × + 107 (-1 …………………………………………………………
for each error) B2 M1
+ R =+ 4.23 ×010 m ………………………………………………………..
(-1 for each error) B2 A0 [3]
+ + 0 (-1 for each error) B2 [6]
(b)(i) ∆Φ = GM/Re – GM/Ro …...………………………………………….….. C1
Total [6]
7 (a) = (6.67 × 10–11 × 6.0 × 1024) ( 1 / 6.4 × 106 – 1 / 4.2 × 107)
λ = h/p or λ = h/mv 7 –1 M1
= 5.31
with λ , h and (or mv)× 10 J kg ………………………………………………….
p identified C1
A1 [2]
Page 4 ∆EP = 5.31 × 107 × 650 Mark ………………………………………………….
Scheme Syllabus C1
Paper
10
(b) 1= 3.45 2
× 10LEVEL
A/AS J ……………………………………………………..
EXAMINATIONS - JUNE 2004 9702 A1
06 [4]
E = mv
(c) e.g.22satellite will already have some speed in the correct direction … C1 B1 [1]
= p /2m or v = √(2E/m), hence M1
22
13 (a)
(a) λ(i)=obeys work
the done
h/√(2mE) = ρ∆V × T ………………………..………………..
law pV = constant A0 C1M1
[2]
5
at all values of p, V and x (150 – 40) x 10-6
= 55T x 10………………………………………………. M1A1 [2]
(c) E = qV = 605 J C1 A0
-9 2 5 -31–2 + 400) – (1020
(ii)n x =10energy
(b) (0.4 (2.9
) x×210wasted
× 3.1x=×10
x 9.11 (2500
10 x) /1.6
(8.31 ×-19
x 10 290) (6.63 x 10-34
J )2
x V+=…..………………..………...
605) = 1275 C1 A1C1
V(iii)
= 9.4 =V efficiency
3.73 molscores
(2 s.f. = 1625/2900
……………………………………………………………….
2/3) A1 C1A1
[3] [2]
= 0.56 or 56% Total A1
[7] [5]
8 (a) S shown at the peak 3 .4 290 B1 [1]
(c)
(b) at new pressure,
similarity: e.g.n = 3.73 × ×
n compression/expansion are both adiabatic B1
2 .9 300
difference: e.g. in petrol engine, energy input at constant volume B1 [2]
(b) (i) Kr and U on right of peak=in4.23 mol relative
correct ….……………………………………….
positions B1
Total [1] C1 [7]
(ii)1 binding change = 0.50
energy of mol = 2.8649 x 10-10 J
U-235……………………………………………………….… C1
number
binding of strokes
energy
Option T - Telecommunications of Ba-144= 0.50
= 1.9211 42-10(must
/ 0.012 x= 10 J round up for mark) ……. A1 [3]
-10
binding energy of Kr-90 = 1.2478 x 10 J C2
1433 (a)
(a) energy correct
10 statement,
lg(P1/P
release ) or
= 23.04 words orJsymbols
10-11lg(P
x 10 …..…………………………...…..
2/P1) (-1 if 1 or 2 s.f.) A1 B1B1 [1]
[3] [1]
2 E = mc2 C1
(b)(i) w =10p∆V ………………………………………………………………….. A1C1
(b) 10-11)/3.0
m = (3.04 xlg(25.4/1.0) = 14 8dB
2
5 x 10 ) = 3.38 x 10-28 kg (ignore s.f.) A1 [2]
=above
1.03the
× 10 × 10–2 – 1.87 × 10–5)
× (2.96level
reference A1 [2]
(iii) e.g. neutrons are single particles,
= (–) 3050 J …………………..……………….…………..…………… A1 [2]
neutrons have no binding energy per nucleon B1 [1]
(c) (i) loss of signal power/energy B1
(ii)(ii)q =length
4.05 ×=10 4
14/3.2J …………………………………………………………. Total [8]
C1B1 [1]
= 4.4 km [3] A1
(iii) ∆U = 4.05 × 104 – 3050 = 37500 J …no e.c.f. from (a)………………… Total A1 [6] [1]
15 (a) amplitude
penalise of the
2 sig.fig. carrier
once onlywave varies M1
in synchrony with the displacement of the information signal A1 [2]
(c) number of molecules = NA ………………………………………………. C1
(b) (i) energy
broadcast
= 37500
8
frequency
/ (6.023
= 1023
× 50 kHz
) C1
3.0 x 10 = 50 x–20 10 x λ C1A1
= 6.2 × 10 J (accept 1 sig.fig.) …………………………..…. [2]
λ = 6000 m A1
4 (a) (i)(ii)ω =bandwidth = 7.0 kHz
2πf ………………………………………………………....………….. A1C1
(iii) maximum frequency = 3.5 kHz A1 [5]
= 2π × 1400
Total [7]
16 (a) = 8800(or
period s–1 is…………………………………………………………..
radorbit) 24 hours B1A1 [2]
equatorial (orbit) B1
(–)ω2x0orbits)
(ii) a0 =(satellite ……………………………..…………………………………
from west to east B1C1 [3]
2 –3
=©(8800) × 0.080 × 10
University–2of Cambridge International Examinations 2004
(b) (i) =allow
62002 m
GHz s → 40 …………………….…………………………………….
GHz B1A1 [2]
(ii) prevent swamping of the (low power) signal received from Earth B1 [2]
(b) straight line through origin with negative gradient …….…………….... M1
(c) end points of line
advantage: correctly
e.g. labelled
fewer satellites……………………………………..
required A1 [2]
aerials point is fixed direction/no tracking required
(c) (i) zero displacement …………………………………………………………
(any sensible suggestion, 1 mark) B1B1 [1]
disadvantage: e.g. noticeable time delay in messages
(ii) v = ωx0 …………………………………………………………………….
reception difficult at Poles C1
–3
= 8800 × 0.080 × 10 (any sensible suggestion, 1 mark) B1 [2]
–1 Total
= 0.70 m s ……………………………………………………………. A1 [7] [2]

CEDAR COLLEGE 290
y = 3 mm C1
= 28.3 × 10–3 √(112 – 32) C1
= 0.30 m s–1 (allow 1 s.f.) A1 [3]
4
4 (a) ∆U = q + w
(allow correct word equation)
9702
B1
41
[1]
Section A
(b) either kinetic energy constant because temperature constant M1
1 (a) angle (subtended) at centre of circle B1
potential energy constant because no intermolecular forces M1
(by) arc equal in length to radius B1 [2]
so no change in internal energy A1 [3]
or kinetic energy and potential energy both constant (M1)
so no change in internal energy (A1)
(b) (i) point S shown below C B1 [1]
reason for either constant k.e. or constant p.e. given (A1)
(ii) (max) force / tension = weight + centripetal force C1
centripetal force = mrω2 C1
5 (a) change/loss in kinetic energy2= change/gain in electric potential energy B1
15 = 3.0/9.8 × 0.85 × ω C1
2 × ½mv2 = q2 / 4πε–10 r C1
ω = 7.6 rad s A1 [4]
2 × ½ × 2 × 1.67 × 10–27 × v2
= (1.6 × 10–19 )2 / (4π × 8.85 × 10–12 × 1.1 × 10–14 ) M1
5
2 (a) v(i)= 2.5 × 10
27.2
6
m s–1 or 27.2 + 273.2
+ 273.15 A0 C1 [3]
300.4 K A1 [2]
2
(b) (ii)
pV =11.6 K > and pV = NkT
½Nm<c C1 A1 [1]
3
½ m<c2> = 2 kT (award 1 mark of first two if <c2> not used) C1
3
½ × 2 × 21.67 × 10–27 × (2.5 × 106 )2 = 2 × 1.38 × 10–23 × T C1
(b) T(i)= 5(<c > 8isKthe) mean / average square speed
× 10 A1 B1 [1]
[4]
(ii) ρ = Nm/V with N explained B1
2
so, pV
(c) e.g. this = 1/3
is very Nm<c
high >
temperature B1
and = with
temperature found in kstars
pV NkT explained B1
2
(any sensible comment, /1<E
so mean kinetic energy K> = ½m<c > = 3/2 kT
mark) B1 [4]
6
(if T < 10 K, should comment that too low for fusion to occur) B1 [1]
(c) (i) pV = nRT
7
6 (a) (i) either × 7.8 loss
2.1 × 10prevent × 10–3 = n × 8.3 flux
of magnetic × 290 C1
n
or = 68 mol
improves flux linkage with secondary B1 A1 [2]
[1]
(ii) mean kinetic
(ii) reduces eddyenergy = 3/2 kT
current (losses) B1
= 1.38 × 10–23 × 290
(in ×core)
reduces losses of energy3/2 B1 C1 [2]
= 6.0 × 10–21 J A1 [2]
(b) (iii) realisatione.m.f.

(i) (induced) that total internal energy
proportional is the
to / equal to total kinetic energy M1 C1
–21
energy
rate = 6.0 ×of10
of change × 68 × flux
(magnetic) × 1023
6.02(linkage) A1 C1 [2]
= 2.46 × 105 J A1 [3]
(ii) changing current in primary gives rise to (1)
changing flux in core (1)
3 (a) (i) flux
to-and-fro / backward
links with and forward
the secondary coil motion (between(1) two limits) B1 [1]
changing flux in secondary coil, inducing e.m.f. (1)
(ii) no energy loss or gain / no external force acting / constant energy / constant amplitude
B1 [1]
© UCLES 2008
(iii) acceleration directed towards a fixed point B1
acceleration proportional to distance from the fixed point / displacement B1 [2]
(b) acceleration is constant (magnitude) M1

so cannot be s.h.m. A1 [2]
CEDAR COLLEGE 291

© UCLES 2010
(iii) graph: g = 0 at least ⅔ distance to Moon B1
gE and gM in opposite directions M1
correct curvature (by eye) and gE > gM at surface A1 [3]
6
2 (a) (i) no forces (of attraction or repulsion) between atoms / molecules / particles B1 [1]
(ii) sum of kinetic and potential energy of atoms / molecules M1

due to random motion A1 [2]
(iii) (random) kinetic energy increases with temperature M1

no potential energy
(so increase in temperature increases internal energy) A1 [2]
(b) (i) zero A1 [1]
(ii) work done = p∆V C1

= 4.0 × 105 × 6 × 10–4
= 240 J (ignore any sign) A1 [2]
(iii)
change work done / J heating / J increase in internal
energy / J
P→Q +240 –600 –360

Q→R 0 +720 +720
R→P –840 +480 –360
(correct signs essential)

(each horizontal line correct, 1 mark – max 3 ) B3 [3]

74 (a) +∆U: increase in internal energy © UCLES 2010 B1

+q : thermal energy / heat supplied to the system B1
+w: work done on the system B1 [3]
(b) (i) (thermal) energy required to change the state of a substance M1

per unit mass A1
without any change of temperature A1 [3]
(ii) when evaporating

greater change in separation of atoms/molecules M1
greater change in volume M1
identifies each difference correctly with ∆U and w A1 [3]
5 (a) (i) (induced) e.m.f. proportional to M1

rate of change of (magnetic) flux (linkage) / rate of flux cutting A1 [2]
(ii) 1. moving magnet causes change of flux linkage B1 [1]

2. speed of magnet varies so varying rate of change of flux B1 [1]
3. magnet changes direction of motion (so current changes direction) B1 [1]
(b) period = 0.75 s C1

CEDAR COLLEGE
frequency = 1.33 Hz 292
A1 [2]
(c) graph: smooth correctly shaped curve with peak at f0 M1

(ii) either pV = NkT or pV = nRT and links n and k
and <EK> = ½m<c2> M1
Page 3 3
Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
clear algebra leading to <EK> = kT A1 [2]
GCE AS/A LEVEL – 2May/June 2012 9702 42
8 (c) (i) graph: horizontal line, y-intercept = 7.0 mJ with end-points of line at
+2.8 cm and
(c) (i) sum of potential –2.8
energy cmkinetic energy of molecules/atoms/particles B1
and M1 [1]
(ii) graph: reasonable curve B1
with maximum
(ii) no intermolecular forcesatso
(0,7.0) end-points
no potential of line at (–2.8, 0)
energy B1
(changeandin) (+2.8, 0) energy is (change in) kinetic energy and this
internal B1 is [2]
proportional to (change in ) T B1 [2]
(iii) graph: inverted version of (ii) M1
with intersections at (–2.0, 3.5) and (+2.0, 3.5) A1 [2]
(Allow marks in (iii), but not in (ii), if graphs K & P are not labelled)
Section A
9
13 (a)
(a) force
sum ofis potential
proportional to the
energy product
and kineticofenergy
the masses and
of atoms/molecules/particles M1
inversely
referenceproportional to the square of the separation
to random (distribution) A1 M1 [2]
(b) (i) as lattice structure is ‘broken’/bonds broken/forces between

(b) (i) gravitational
molecules force provides
reduced the centripetal
(not molecules separate)force B1 B1
2 2 2
mv /r = GMm/r and E K
no change in kinetic energy,= ½mv
potential energy increases M1 M1
hence K = GMm/2r
internalEenergy increases A1 A0 [2]
[3]
(ii)
(ii) 1. ∆EK =
either ½ × 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30
molecules/atoms/particles × 106}–1<c–2{7.34
move faster/ × 106}–1)
> is increasing C1
7
or = 9.26 ×energy
kinetic 10 J (ignore
increasesanywith
signtemperature
in answer) (increases) B1 A1 [2]
8
(allow 1.0 × 10 J if evidence that
no change in potential energy, kinetic energy E K evaluated separately for each r) M1
increases
2. ∆EP = 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1) C1
8
4 (a) (i) as r (allow 1.8 orenergy
decreases, 1.9 × 10 J)
decreases/work got out (due to) M1
attraction so point mass is negatively charged A1 [2]
(ii) speed
electrichas increased
potential energy = charge × electric potential B1 A1 [2]
10 field strength = gradient of potential energy graph/charge A0 [2]
2 (a) (i) sum of potential energy and kinetic energy of atoms / molecules / particles M1
reference to random A1 [2]
(b) tangent drawn at (4.0, 14.5) B1
(ii)
gradient = 3.6 × 10–24 forces
no intermolecular A2 B1
(for <no potential
±0.3 allow 2energy
marks, for < ±0.6 allow 1 mark) B1
–24 –19random motion) of molecules
field strengthenergy
internal = (3.6 ×is 10
kinetic energy
) / (1.6 (of
× 10 ) B1 [3]
(reference to random –5 motion–1 here then allow back credit
= 2.3 × 10 V m (allow ecf from gradient value)to (i) if M1 scored)
A1 [4]
–5 –1
(one point solution for gradient leading to 2.3 × 10 Vm scores 1 mark only)

or temperature in kelvin is not doubled B1 [2]
3 (a) temperature of the spheres is the same B1

(b) (i) power = m × c × ∆θ where m is mass per second C1

3800 = m × 4.2 × (42 – 18) C1
m = 38 g s–1 A1 [3]
CEDAR COLLEGE
293
(ii) some thermal energy is lost to the surroundings M1
either reference to 22 point masses or separation >> ‘size’ of masses A1 [2]
= 7.57 × 10 C1
R = 4.2 × 107 m A1 [3]
(b) gravitational
(missingforce provides
out 3600 givesthe × 105 m and
1.8centripetal force
scores 2/3 marks) B1
2 2
GMm / R = mRω M1
where m is the mass of the planet A1
112 GM(a) =(i)R3ω1.2 pV = nRT A0 [3]
1.80 × 10–3 × 2.60 × 105 = n × 8.31 × 297 C1
n = 0.19 mol A1 [2]
(c) ω = 2π / T C1
either M2. star / ∆q
MSun = (Rstar / RSun)3 × (TSun / Tstar)2
= mc∆T
3 2
Mstar = 95.0
4 ×=(½)0.190 × 10×30∆T
× 12.5
× 2.0 C1 B1
= = 40
∆T3.2 K31 kg
× 10 A1 A1[3] [2]
2 3
or Mstar = (allow
(2π) 2Rmarks for2 correct answer with clear logic shown)
star / GT (C1)
= {(2π)2 × (6.0 × 1011)3} / {6.67 × 10–11 × (2 × 365 × 24 × 3600)2} (C1)
(ii) p/T == constant
3.2 × 1031 kg (A1)
(2.6 × 105) / 297 = p / (297 + 40) M1
2 (a) (i) sum pof=kinetic 2.95 ×and105 potential
Pa energies of the molecules M1 A0 [1]
reference to random distribution A1 [2]
change
(b) for
(ii) ideal in internal
gas, energy is 120forces
no intermolecular J / 25 J M1 B1
internal energy decreases / ∆U is
so no potential energy (only kinetic) negative / kinetic energy of molecules decreases
A1 M1[2]
so temperature lower A1 [3]
= 2240 J A1 [2]
or R = kNA
energy = 3/2 × 1.0 × 8.31 × 180 (C1)
= 2240 J (A1)
12
(ii) increase in internal energy = heat supplied + work done on system B1
2240 = energy supplied – 1500 C1
energy supplied = 3740 J A1 [3]

from infinity
Page 3 (to the point) Mark Scheme Syllabus A1
Paper[2]
13
3(b) (a)
(i) either both potentials
either change in volume are= positive / same
(1.69 – 1.00 sign
× 10 –3
) M1
or so same sign
liquid volume << volume of vapour A1 M1[2]
or done
work gradients are
= 1.01 × 10positive
5
× 1.69 &= negative
1.71 × 10(so
5
(J)fields in opposite directions) (M1) A1 [2]
so same sign © Cambridge International Examinations 2013 (A1)
(b) (i) 1. heating of system/thermal energy supplied to the system B1 [1]
2. work done on the system B1 [1]
(ii) ∆U = (2.26 × 106) – (1.71 × 105 ) C1
(iv) V = 0.43 V (allow 0.42 V → 0.44 V) M1
= 2.09 × 106 J (3 s.f. needed) A1 [2]
energy = 2 × 1.6 × 10–19 × 0.43 A1
= 1.4 × 10–19 J A1 [3]
4 (a) kinetic (energy)/KE/EK B1 [1]
(b) either change in energy = 0.60 mJ
or max E proportional to (amplitude)2 /equivalent numerical working B1
new amplitude is 1.3 cm B1
change in amplitude = 0.2 cm B1 [3]
(a) graph: straight line at constant potential = V0 from x = 0 to x = r

5 B1
curve with decreasing gradient M1
CEDAR COLLEGE passing through (2r, 0.50V0 ) and (4r, 0.25V0 ) 294
A1 [3]
(b) graph: straight line at E = 0 from x = 0 to x = r B1

A2 - Workbook 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A2 - Workbook 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A2 - Workbook 1 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A2

(i) The Moon is approximately 3.8 × 105 km from Earth.

diameter = .................................................. km [2]

© UCLES 2014 9702/42/M/J/14

(i) what is meant by a radian,

(ii) why one complete revolution is equivalent to an angular displacement of 2 rad.

© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07

Fig. 1.2 Fig. 1.3

Calculate the length L of the cord, assuming it obeys Hooke’s law.

© UCLES 2007 9702/04/O/N/07 [Turn over

3 1 (a) (i) Define the radian.

© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08

where W is the weight of the mass M.

number = ........................................... [5]

(c) The plate in (b) is covered, when stationary, with mud.

© UCLES 2008 9702/04/M/J/08 [Turn over

4 1 (a) Define the radian.

For the position of the stone at which the glue snaps,

(ii) calculate the angular speed ω of the stone.

angular speed = ................................... rad s–1 [4]

(i) what is meant by angular velocity,

(ii) the relation between x and T.

where c is a constant. Explain your working.

Assume that the orbits of both planets are circular.

T = ....................................... years [2]

(ii) Determine the linear speed of Venus in its orbit.

speed = ..................................... km s–1 [2]

6 1 (a) State Newton’s law of gravitation.

(b) A satellite of mass m is in a circular orbit of radius r about a planet of mass M.

Fig. 1.1 (not to scale)

change in kinetic energy = ............................................. J [2]

2. gravitational potential energy.

change in potential energy = ............................................. J [2]

7 2 A large bowl is made from part of a hollow sphere.

The normal reaction force R is at an angle θ to the horizontal.

Calculate the speed of the ball.

speed = ............................................... m s−1 [3]

(b) (i) m R Bqr / v C1

(ii) q / m ∝ 1 / r or m constant and q ∝ 1 / r B1

(b) (i) arc R distance × angle C1

3 1 (a) (i) angle (subtended) at centre of circle B1

(b) friction provides / equals the centripetal force B1

(c) either centripetal force increases as r increases

(b) (i) p = !" ρ<c2> C1

(b) (ii) ρ = Nm/V

6 1 (a) force is proportional to the product of the masses and

(b) (i) gravitational force provides the centripetal force B1

(ii) 1. ∆EK = ½ × 4.00 × 1014 × 620 × ({7.30 × 106}–1 – {7.34 × 106}–1) C1

(b) ∆EP = mg∆h

7 2 (a) (i) F = R cosθ M1

(b) either F = mv2 / r and W = mg

3 (a) obeys the equation pV / T = constant B1 [1]

(b) (i) pV = nRT

(ii) pressure ∝ amount of substance

(b) A satellite is placed in geostationary orbit around the Earth.

(i) Calculate the angular speed of the satellite in its orbit.

angular speed = ........................................ rad s–1 [3]

radius = ........................................ m [3]

(ii) Hence show that

7 2   (a) (i) F = R cosθ M1